双运论的注释
Yuganaddhakathāvaṇṇanā
1现在,为了说明具有“醍醐味”功德的圣道在止观双运方面的功德,而对前面所说的、以经教为先导的双运论作补充解释,阐明其中未曾说过的义理。不过应当知道:法将舍利弗在法王佛陀还住世时,就在法王般涅槃的同一年入了般涅槃。因此,这部经是法藏守护者阿难在法王还住世时,亲耳从佛陀面前听闻之后,以“如是我闻”等语开头传述出来的。其中,“具寿”是亲昵的称呼、尊重的称呼,带有恭敬和谦逊之意,意思是“有寿命的”。“阿难”是那位长老的名字。因为他刚一出生,就给家族带来了极大的欢喜,所以给他取名为“阿难”,应当这样理解。“在憍赏弥”:是指在那座同名城市。因为那座城市的园林、池塘等各处,长满了憍赏弥树,所以得名憍赏弥。也有人说:“因为建在仙人拘赏婆的茅棚不远处,所以叫憍赏弥。”
1. Idāni maṇḍapeyyaguṇassa ariyamaggassa yuganaddhaguṇaṃ dassentena kathitāya suttantapubbaṅgamāya yuganaddhakathāya apubbatthānuvaṇṇanā. Yasmā pana dhammasenāpati dhammarāje dharamāneyeva dhammarājassa parinibbānasaṃvacchare parinibbuto, tasmā dhammarāje dharamāneyeva dhammabhaṇḍāgārikena desitaṃ idaṃ suttantaṃ tasseva sammukhā sutvā evaṃ me sutantiādimāhāti veditabbaṃ. Tattha āyasmāti piyavacanaṃ garuvacanaṃ sagāravasappatissavacanaṃ, āyumāti attho. Ānandoti tassa therassa nāmaṃ. So hi jāyamānoyeva kule ānandaṃ bhusaṃ tuṭṭhiṃ akāsi. Tasmāssa ‘‘ānando’’ti nāmaṃ katanti veditabbaṃ. Kosambiyanti evaṃnāmake nagare. Tassa hi nagarassa ārāmapokkharaṇīādīsu tesu tesu ṭhānesu kosambarukkhā ussannā ahesuṃ, tasmā taṃ kosambīti saṅkhaṃ agamāsi. ‘‘Kusambassa isino assamato avidūre māpitattā’’ti eke.
“瞿师罗”是指瞿师罗长者所建的园林。在憍赏弥,有三位长者:瞿师罗长者、鸡长者和波婆梨迦长者。他们三人听说“佛陀已出现在世间”,就各自让人用五百辆车装满布施的物品,前往舍卫城。他们在祇园附近扎营,然后来到导师跟前,顶礼问讯后坐下听导师说法,证得了入流果。接着他们邀请导师,并以佛陀为首的比丘僧团为对象,做了半个月的大布施。之后他们伏在世尊脚前,请求世尊到他们的家乡去。世尊说:“居士们,如来乐于住在空寂之处。”他们明白“世尊已经答应了”,非常欢喜,顶礼十力世尊后便离开了。在回去的路上,他们每隔一由旬就为世尊建造一处住所,就这样一路回到憍赏弥,然后各自在自己的园林里投入大量钱财,为世尊建起了精舍。其中,瞿师罗长者所建的叫瞿师罗,鸡长者所建的叫鸡园,波婆梨迦长者在芒果林中所建的叫波婆梨迦芒果林。这里所说的“在瞿师罗长者所建的园林中”,指的就是瞿师罗。
Ghositārāmeti ghositaseṭṭhinā kārite ārāme. Kosambiyañhi tayo seṭṭhino ahesuṃ ghositaseṭṭhi kukkuṭaseṭṭhi pāvārikaseṭṭhīti. Te tayopi ‘‘loke buddho uppanno’’ti sutvā pañcahi pañcahi sakaṭasatehi dānūpakaraṇāni gāhāpetvā sāvatthiṃ gantvā jetavanasamīpe khandhāvāraṃ bandhitvā satthu santikaṃ gantvā vanditvā paṭisanthāraṃ katvā nisinnā satthu dhammadesanaṃ sutvā sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhahitvā satthāraṃ nimantetvā buddhappamukhassa bhikkhusaṅghassa aḍḍhamāsamattaṃ mahādānaṃ datvā bhagavato pādamūle nipajjitvā sakajanapadagamanatthaṃ bhagavantaṃ yācitvā ‘‘suññāgāre kho gahapatayo tathāgatā abhiramantī’’ti bhagavatā vutte ‘‘dinnā no bhagavatā paṭiññā’’ti ñatvā ativiya tuṭṭhā dasabalaṃ vanditvā nikkhantā antarāmagge yojane yojane bhagavato nivāsatthaṃ vihāraṃ kārentā anupubbena kosambiṃ patvā attano attano ārāme mahantaṃ dhanapariccāgaṃ katvā bhagavato vihāre kārāpayiṃsu. Tattha ghositaseṭṭhinā kārito ghositārāmo nāma ahosi, kukkuṭaseṭṭhinā kārito kukkuṭārāmo nāma, pāvārikaseṭṭhinā ambavane kārito pāvārikambavanaṃ nāma. Taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘ghositaseṭṭhinā kārite ārāme’’ti.
贤友比丘们:在这里,诸佛世尊称呼弟子时,直接叫“比丘们”。但弟子们心想“我们不要跟佛陀一样”,所以先称“贤友”,然后再说“比丘们”。被佛陀称呼时,比丘僧团回答“尊者”;被弟子们称呼时,则回答“贤友”。
Āvuso bhikkhavoti ettha buddhā bhagavanto sāvake ālapantā ‘‘bhikkhavo’’ti ālapanti. Sāvakā pana ‘‘buddhehi sadisā mā homā’’ti ‘‘āvuso’’ti paṭhamaṃ vatvā pacchā ‘‘bhikkhavo’’ti vadanti. Buddhehi ca ālapite bhikkhusaṅgho ‘‘bhadante’’ti paṭivacanaṃ deti, sāvakehi ālapite ‘‘āvuso’’ti.
“若有任何人”是一个不确定的说法。通过这个说法,涵盖了所有这类比丘。“在我身边”,就是在我近旁。“已证得阿罗汉果”,是说自己已经达到了阿罗汉果。这是用中性词来表达已经成就的意思。或者也可以断句为“证得阿罗汉”,意思就是自己证得了阿罗汉。或者也可以理解为省略了“自己”,完整的说法是“记说自己已证得阿罗汉”。“由四道”,指的是下面将要分别说的四种修行之道,不是指四种圣道。因为这里另外说了“由四道”,所以应当知道:某位阿罗汉的第一圣道是以法掉举为先导的道,另一位的第一圣道是以止为先导,还有一位是以观为先导,再有一位是以止观双运为先导——这样就有四种修行之道。“或由其中之一”,意思是在这四种修行之道中,依靠其中任何一种证得阿罗汉果,就记说自己是阿罗汉。比如,纯观行者的阿罗汉,以法掉举为先导而证得入流道,其余三道也完全依靠纯观而证得,所以他证得阿罗汉果,就是以法掉举为先导的道。又比如,不论是否经历过法掉举的困扰,凡是依靠止为先导等其余三种修行之道中的某一种、证得四道的阿罗汉,他证得阿罗汉果就是以那一种道为先导的。因此说“或由其中之一”。
Yo hi kocīti aniyamavacanaṃ. Etena tādisānaṃ sabbabhikkhūnaṃ pariyādānaṃ. Mama santiketi mama samīpe. Arahattappattanti attanā arahattassa pattaṃ. Napuṃsake bhāve siddhavacanaṃ. Arahattaṃ pattanti vā padacchedo, attanā pattaṃ arahattanti attho. Arahattappattaṃ attānanti vā pāṭhaseso. Catūhi maggehīti upari vuccamānehi catūhi paṭipadāmaggehi, na ariyamaggehi. ‘‘Catūhi maggehī’’ti visuñca vuttattā kassaci arahato paṭhamassa ariyamaggassa dhammuddhaccapubbaṅgamo maggo, ekassa ariyamaggassa samathapubbaṅgamo, ekassa vipassanāpubbaṅgamo, ekassa yuganaddhapubbaṅgamoti evaṃ cattāropi paṭipadā maggā hontīti veditabbaṃ. Etesaṃ vā aññatarenāti etesaṃ catunnaṃ paṭipadānaṃ maggānaṃ ekena vā, paṭipadāmaggena arahattappattaṃ byākarotīti attho. Sukkhavipassakassa hi arahato dhammuddhaccapubbaṅgamaṃ sotāpattimaggaṃ patvā sesamaggattayampi suddhavipassanāhiyeva pattassa arahattappatti dhammuddhaccapubbaṅgamamaggā hoti. Dhammuddhaccaviggahaṃ patvā vā appatvā vā samathapubbaṅgamādīnaṃ tiṇṇaṃ paṭipadānaṃ maggānaṃ ekekassa vasena pattacatumaggassa arahato arahattappatti itaraekekamaggapubbaṅgamā hoti. Tasmā āha – ‘‘etesaṃ vā aññatarenā’’ti.
先修止、再以止为前导来修观,意思是:把止当作先行和前导,先让定生起来,然后再修观。道生起,意思是第一个出世间道生起。关于“他修习、多修习那个道”等说法:对于一个心识刹那就灭去的道来说,确实不存在反复修习等事;但为了引生第二道等而继续用功时,就可以说是在修习、多修习那个道。诸结被断除,诸随眠被彻底灭尽:一直到阿拉汉道,一切结依次被断除,一切随眠被彻底消灭。诸随眠被彻底灭尽,意思是它们因为永远不会再生起,所以达到了完全灭尽的状态。
Samathapubbaṅgamaṃ vipassanaṃ bhāvetīti samathaṃ pubbaṅgamaṃ purecārikaṃ katvā vipassanaṃ bhāveti, paṭhamaṃ samādhiṃ uppādetvā pacchā vipassanaṃ bhāvetīti attho. Maggo sañjāyatīti paṭhamo lokuttaramaggo nibbattati. So taṃ maggantiādīsu ekacittakkhaṇikassa maggassa āsevanādīni nāma natthi, dutiyamaggādayo pana uppādento tameva maggaṃ ‘‘āsevati bhāveti bahulīkarotī’’ti vuccati. Saññojanāni pahīyanti, anusayā byantīhontīti yāva arahattamaggā kamena sabbe saññojanā pahīyanti, anusayā byantīhonti. Anusayā byantīhontīti ca puna anuppattiyā vigatantā hontīti attho.
再者,是另一个理由。以观为先导来修止,意思是把观放在前面、作为先行,然后修止;也就是先生起观,之后再修定,这就是它的含义。修习双运,意思是把止和观结合起来修。在这里,不可能用同一个心进入等至之后,又用同一个心去观察诸行。而是,这个人能进入多深的等至,就能观察诸行到多深的程度;能观察诸行到多深的程度,就能进入多深的等至。怎么修呢?先进入初禅,出定之后观察诸行;观察诸行之后,进入第二禅,出定之后观察诸行;观察诸行之后,进入第三禅……乃至进入非想非非想处等至,出定之后观察诸行。这样修,就叫作修习止观双运。
Puna caparanti puna ca aparaṃ kāraṇaṃ. Vipassanāpubbaṅgamaṃ samathaṃ bhāvetīti vipassanaṃ pubbaṅgamaṃ purecārikaṃ katvā samathaṃ bhāveti, paṭhamaṃ vipassanaṃ uppādetvā pacchā samādhiṃ bhāvetīti attho. Yuganaddhaṃ bhāvetīti yuganaddhaṃ katvā bhāveti. Ettha teneva cittena samāpattiṃ samāpajjitvā teneva saṅkhāre sammasituṃ na sakkā. Ayaṃ pana yāvatā samāpattiyo samāpajjati, tāvatā saṅkhāre sammasati. Yāvatā saṅkhāre sammasati, tāvatā samāpattiyo samāpajjati. Kathaṃ? Paṭhamajjhānaṃ samāpajjati, tato vuṭṭhāya saṅkhāre sammasati. Saṅkhāre sammasitvā dutiyajjhānaṃ samāpajjati, tato vuṭṭhāya saṅkhāre sammasati. Saṅkhāre sammasitvā tatiyajjhānaṃ…pe… nevasaññānāsaññāyatanasamāpattiṃ samāpajjati, tato vuṭṭhāya saṅkhāre sammasati. Evaṃ samathavipassanaṃ yuganaddhaṃ bhāveti nāma.
心被法掉举所扰乱:在这里,对于智慧迟钝的修观者来说,因为观随烦恼是他们的烦恼基础,所以以迷乱故,因伴随掉举之心生起,那被称为散乱的掉举即是法掉举。被这种法掉举所执取、所歪曲执取、被导致对立的心,就是心被法掉举所扰乱。或者,以这种法掉举为原因,生起以它为根源的渴爱、慢、见,因此心被执取,也是心被法掉举所扰乱。也有读作心被法掉举所扰乱的。贤友,那时存在:这是通过确定道与非道,排除那种法掉举之后,再次进入观道的时候。所谓那时的心,就是在那个时刻进入观道而运转的心。只向内住立:进入观道之后,在那个时刻,心在被称为内所缘的所缘上住立、确立。安静:就在那里以持续运转的方式正确地静息下来。成为一境:心变得专一。定:被正确地安置,很好地确立。
Dhammuddhaccaviggahitaṃ mānasaṃ hotīti ettha mandapaññānaṃ vipassakānaṃ upakkilesavatthuttā vipassanupakkilesasaññitesu obhāsādīsu dasasu dhammesu bhantatāvasena uddhaccasahagatacittuppattiyā vikkhepasaṅkhātaṃ uddhaccaṃ dhammuddhaccaṃ, tena dhammuddhaccena viggahitaṃ virūpaggahitaṃ virodhamāpāditaṃ mānasaṃ cittaṃ dhammuddhaccaviggahitaṃ mānasaṃ hoti, tena vā dhammuddhaccena kāraṇabhūtena tammūlakataṇhāmānadiṭṭhuppattiyā viggahitaṃ mānasaṃ hoti. Dhammuddhaccaviggahitamānasanti vā pāṭho. Hoti so āvuso samayoti iminā maggāmaggavavatthānena taṃ dhammuddhaccaṃ paṭibāhitvā puna vipassanāvīthiṃ paṭipannakālaṃ dasseti. Yaṃ taṃ cittanti yasmiṃ samaye taṃ vipassanāvīthiṃ okkamitvā pavattaṃ cittaṃ. Ajjhattameva santiṭṭhatīti vipassanāvīthiṃ paccotaritvā tasmiṃ samaye gocarajjhattasaṅkhāte ārammaṇe santiṭṭhati patiṭṭhāti. Sannisīdatīti tattheva pavattivasena sammā nisīdati. Ekodi hotīti ekaggaṃ hoti. Samādhiyatīti sammā ādhiyati suṭṭhu ṭhitaṃ hotīti.
《经义释》的注释
1. Suttantaniddesavaṇṇanā
2在这部经的解说中,“在那里生起的法”指的是在那定中生起的心和心所法。“以无常随观之义”等,是在说明观的分类。“正见之道”就是被称为正见的道。因为在八支道中,每一支都可以称为道。“习行”是依入流道而说。“修习”是以生起一来道而说。“多作”是以生起不来道和阿拉汉道而说。这三者虽然状态不同,但因为转向等都是共通的,所以作了相同的回答。
2. Tassa suttantassa niddesakathāya tattha jāte dhammeti tasmiṃ samādhismiṃ jāte cittacetasike dhamme. Aniccato anupassanaṭṭhenātiādinā vipassanāya bhedaṃ dasseti. Sammādiṭṭhi maggoti sammādiṭṭhisaṅkhāto maggo. Aṭṭhasu maggaṅgesu ekekopi hi maggoti vuccati.Āsevatīti sotāpattimaggavasena. Bhāvetīti sakadāgāmimagguppādanena. Bahulīkarotīti anāgāmiarahattamagguppādanena. Imesaṃ tiṇṇaṃ avatthābhedepi sati āvajjanādīnaṃ sādhāraṇattā sadisameva vissajjanaṃ kataṃ.
3在“光明想、舍离、随观”的中间省略部分中,无散乱等,以及禅那、等至、遍、随念、不净,还有长入出息等,因为在《无间定智解说》(《无碍解道》1.80-81)里已经详细说明,所以这里省略不说了。其中,“依无散乱”应当理解为:依前分阶段的无散乱来把握。而在“随观无常的入出息”等纯粹以观修来说的四种情况中,当观还薄弱的时候,应当知道那是以与观相应的定作为前导、以定为助力的强有力之观。
3. Ālokasaññāpaṭinissaggānupassanānaṃ antarāpeyyāle avikkhepādīni ca jhāna samāpattikasiṇānussatiasubhā ca dīghaṃ assāsādīni ca ānantarikasamādhiñāṇaniddese (paṭi. ma. 1.80-81) niddiṭṭhattā saṅkhittāni. Tattha ca avikkhepavasenāti pubbabhāgāvikkhepavasena gahetabbaṃ. Aniccānupassī assāsavasenātiādike suddhavipassanāvasena vuttacatukke pana taruṇavipassanākāle vipassanāsampayuttasamādhipubbaṅgamā balavavipassanā veditabbā.
4在“观为前导”的章节里,先以“无常”等说法不限定所缘来讲观,之后又以“色是无常”等说法限定所缘来讲观。其中,“已生起的”,是指由那种观所生起的心与心所诸法。“以舍离为所缘”中,“舍离”就是涅槃。因为涅槃是从有为法中舍离、从彻底放舍的意义上被称为“舍离”。观以及和观相应的那些法,由于倾向涅槃、以它们的意向立足于涅槃,所以是“以涅槃为立足处”“以涅槃为所缘”。其实,立足处也会被执取,因此也可称为所缘;正因为它们立足于涅槃,所以就是以涅槃为所缘。在其他经典里,立足处也被称为所缘。正如经中说:“贤友,譬如一座芦苇屋或茅草屋,干燥、枯槁、历经多年,如果有人从东边拿着燃烧的火把走近,火就能找到入口,火就能找到所缘。”等等。因此,对于那里已生起的诸法,由于以舍离为所缘、以立足于涅槃为因,所生起的心一境性——也就是被称为近行与安止的无散乱——那就是定。这就是在观之后生起的抉择分定,在这里已经说明了。正因为如此,才说“先是观,之后是止”。
4. Vipassanāpubbaṅgamavāre paṭhamaṃ aniccatotiādinā ārammaṇaṃ aniyametvā vipassanā vuttā, pacchā rūpaṃ aniccatotiādinā ārammaṇaṃ niyametvā vuttā. Tattha jātānanti tassā vipassanāya jātānaṃ cittacetasikānaṃ dhammānaṃ. Vosaggārammaṇatāti ettha vosaggo nibbānaṃ. Nibbānañhi saṅkhatavosaggato pariccāgato ‘‘vosaggo’’ti vutto. Vipassanā ca taṃsampayuttadhammā ca nibbānaninnatāya ajjhāsayavasena nibbāne patiṭṭhitattā nibbānapatiṭṭhā nibbānārammaṇā. Patiṭṭhāpi hi ālambīyatīti ārammaṇaṃ nāma hoti, nibbāne patiṭṭhaṭṭheneva nibbānārammaṇā. Aññattha pāḷiyampi hi patiṭṭhā ‘‘ārammaṇa’’nti vuccanti. Yathāha – ‘‘seyyathāpi, āvuso, naḷāgāraṃ vā tiṇāgāraṃ vā sukkhaṃ koḷāpaṃ terovassikaṃ puratthimāya cepi disāya puriso ādittāya tiṇukkāya upasaṅkameyya, labhetha aggi otāraṃ, labhetha aggi ārammaṇa’’ntiādi (saṃ. ni. 4.243). Tasmā tattha jātānaṃ dhammānaṃ vosaggārammaṇatāya nibbānapatiṭṭhābhāvena hetubhūtena uppādito yo cittassa ekaggatāsaṅkhāto upacārappanābhedo avikkhepo, so samādhīti vipassanāto pacchā uppādito nibbedhabhāgiyo samādhi niddiṭṭho hoti. Tasmāyeva hi iti paṭhamaṃ vipassanā, pacchā samathoti vuttaṃ.
5在“双连”的解说中,因为前面经疏里所说的双连次第,已经通过前两种解说的方式变得清楚,但道刹那的双连次第并不清楚,所以他没有讲前分中并非决定性的双连修习,而是直接说明道刹那中必然获得的双连修习,因此说“以十六种行相”等。其中,在“所缘义”等十七种行相里,最后列出的“双连”因为和根本词意义相同,所以把它放下,依其余的行相来说“十六种”。“所缘义”就是所依托的意义,意思是依所缘而说。其余各项也是这样。“行境义”就是在有所缘义时,依所依处之义。“断义”就是断除之义。“舍义”就是在断除时,再以不执取之义为舍义。“出起义”就是向上超出之义。“还灭义”就是在向上超出时,再以不再回转之义为返回之义。“寂静义”就是寂灭之义。“胜妙义”就是在寂灭时,再以最上之义,或以不令满足之义为胜妙义。“解脱义”就是摆脱束缚之义。“无漏义”就是在解脱束缚时,再以作为所缘而转起之漏不存在之义为无漏义。“渡义”就是没有沉没而浮起之义,或超越之义。“无相义”就是没有行相之义。“无愿义”就是没有愿求之义。“空义”就是没有执著之义。“一味义”就是同一作用之义。“不超越义”就是彼此不逾越之义。“双连义”就是成对之义。
5. Yuganaddhaniddese yasmā heṭṭhā suttantavaṇṇanāyaṃ vutto yuganaddhakkamo purimadvayaniddesanayeneva pākaṭo, maggakkhaṇe yuganaddhakkamo pana na pākaṭo, tasmā pubbabhāge anekantikaṃ yuganaddhabhāvanaṃ avatvā maggakkhaṇe ekantena labbhamānayuganaddhabhāvanameva dassento soḷasahi ākārehītiādimāha. Tattha ārammaṇaṭṭhenātiādīsu sattarasasu ākāresu ante uddiṭṭhaṃ yuganaddhaṃ mūlapadena ekaṭṭhattā taṃ vippahāya sesānaṃ vasena ‘‘soḷasahī’’ti vuttaṃ. Ārammaṇaṭṭhenāti ālambanaṭṭhena, ārammaṇavasenāti attho. Evaṃ sesesupi. Gocaraṭṭhenāti ārammaṇaṭṭhepi sati nissayitabbaṭṭhānaṭṭhena. Pahānaṭṭhenāti pajahanaṭṭhena. Pariccāgaṭṭhenāti pahānepi sati puna anādiyanena pariccāgaṭṭhena. Vuṭṭhānaṭṭhenāti uggamanaṭṭhena. Vivaṭṭanaṭṭhenāti uggamanepi sati apunarāvaṭṭanena nivattanaṭṭhena. Santaṭṭhenāti nibbutaṭṭhena. Paṇītaṭṭhenāti nibbutaṭṭhepi sati uttamaṭṭhena, atappakaṭṭhena vā. Vimuttaṭṭhenāti bandhanāpagataṭṭhena. Anāsavaṭṭhenāti bandhanamokkhepi sati ārammaṇaṃ katvā pavattamānāsavavirahitaṭṭhena. Taraṇaṭṭhenāti anosīditvā pilavanaṭṭhena, atikkamanaṭṭhena vā. Animittaṭṭhenāti saṅkhāranimittavirahitaṭṭhena. Appaṇihitaṭṭhenāti paṇidhivirahitaṭṭhena. Suññataṭṭhenāti abhinivesavirahitaṭṭhena. Ekarasaṭṭhenāti ekakiccaṭṭhena. Anativattanaṭṭhenāti aññamaññaṃ anatikkamanaṭṭhena. Yuganaddhaṭṭhenāti yugalakaṭṭhena.
舍弃掉举、舍弃无明——这是就修行者断除各自对立面的角度来说的。这里的“灭”指的就是涅槃。“彼此不超越”:如果止超过了观,因为止偏向沉滞一边,心就会陷于懈怠;如果观超过了止,因为观偏向掉举一边,心就会陷于散乱。所以,止不超越观,心就不会陷入懈怠;观不超越止,心就不会陷入掉举。止在平衡中运作时,能保护观不落入掉举;观在平衡中运作时,能保护止不落入懈怠。这样,两者因彼此不超越的作用而成为同一作用,在平衡中运作、彼此不超越,就能成办利益。它们在道刹那时的双运结合,在出起所行观的刹那也同样是双运结合。因为是从断除、舍遣、出起、还灭的作用之道作用来说的,为了显示整个道的作用,所以指出了与掉举俱行的烦恼及诸蕴,以及与无明俱行的烦恼及诸蕴。其余诸法没有那样说的缘故,所以从只显示对立法的角度,仅指出了掉举和无明。还灭,即回转者的。
Uddhaccaṃ pajahato, avijjaṃ pajahatoti yogino tassa tassa paṭipakkhappahānavasena vuttaṃ. Nirodho cettha nibbānameva. Aññamaññaṃ nātivattantīti samatho ce vipassanaṃ ativatteyya, līnapakkhikattā samathassa cittaṃ kosajjāya saṃvatteyya. Vipassanā ce samathaṃ ativatteyya, uddhaccapakkhikattā vipassanāya cittaṃ uddhaccāya saṃvatteyya. Tasmā samatho ca vipassanaṃ anativattamāno kosajjapātaṃ na karoti, vipassanā samathaṃ anativattamānā uddhaccapātaṃ na karoti. Samatho samaṃ pavattamāno vipassanaṃ uddhaccapātato rakkhati, vipassanā samaṃ pavattamānā samathaṃ kosajjapātato rakkhati. Evamime ubho aññamaññaṃ anativattanakiccena ekakiccā, samā hutvā pavattamānena aññamaññaṃ anativattamānā atthasiddhikarā honti. Tesaṃ maggakkhaṇe yuganaddhattaṃ vuṭṭhānagāminivipassanākkhaṇe yuganaddhattāyeva hoti. Pahānapariccāgavuṭṭhānavivaṭṭanakaraṇānaṃ maggakiccavasena vuttattā sakalassa maggakiccassa dassanatthaṃ uddhaccasahagatakilesā ca khandhā ca avijjāsahagatakilesā ca khandhā ca niddiṭṭhā. Sesānaṃ na tathā vuttattā paṭipakkhadhammamattadassanavasena uddhaccāvijjā eva niddiṭṭhā. Vivaṭṭatoti nivattantassa.
“定从欲漏解脱”:这是针对定与欲贪相对立而说的。“贪离染”:因为具有对贪的离染与超越,所以称为贪离染;也可以理解为“从贪离染”,这是从格用法。同样地,“无明离染”也是如此。“心解脱”:指与道相应的定。“慧解脱”:指与道相应的慧。“度越”:指正在度越的人。“从一切愿求”:指从贪、嗔、痴的愿求中出离,或者说从一切渴望中出离。这样解答了十四种行相之后,不再对一味义和彼此不超越义另作分别,而说“以这十六种行相”。为什么?因为在十四种行相的每一相末尾,都已说明“它们是同一味、是双运、彼此不超越”,所以那两种行相实际上也已解说完毕。因此说“十六”。不过,双运之义在最初的标举中并未明确说出。
Samādhi kāmāsavā vimutto hotīti samādhissa kāmacchandapaṭipakkhattā vuttaṃ. Rāgavirāgāti rāgassa virāgo samatikkamo etissā atthīti rāgavirāgā, ‘‘rāgavirāgato’’ti nissakkavacanaṃ vā. Tathā avijjāvirāgā. Cetovimuttīti maggasampayutto samādhi. Paññāvimuttīti maggasampayuttā paññā. Taratoti tarantassa. Sabbapaṇidhīhīti rāgadosamohapaṇidhīhi, sabbapatthanāhi vā. Evaṃ cuddasa ākāre vissajjitvā ekarasaṭṭhañca anativattanaṭṭhañca avibhajitvāva imehi soḷasahi ākārehīti āha. Kasmā? Tesaṃ cuddasannaṃ ākārānaṃ ekekassa avasāne ‘‘ekarasā honti, yuganaddhā honti, aññamaññaṃ nātivattantī’’ti niddiṭṭhattā te dvepi ākārā niddiṭṭhāva honti. Tasmā ‘‘soḷasahī’’ti āha. Yuganaddhaṭṭho pana uddesepi na bhaṇitoyevāti.
2. 法掉举章的解说注释
2. Dhammuddhaccavāraniddesavaṇṇanā
6在法掉举这一章里说“作意无常的人,光明会生起”,意思是:一个安住在生灭随观中的修行者,用无常、苦、无我这三种随观反复不断地观察诸行,当他的观智逐渐成熟,依靠彼分断的方式断除烦恼、心得清净之后,在作意无常、或苦、或无我的那一刹那,凭着观智的力量,光明自然就会生起。这里先说的是作意无常的人光明如何生起。不善巧的观行者,在这种光明出现时,心里想:“我从前从来没有生起过这样的光明,我一定是证得道了,一定是证得果了。”于是把不是道的当成道,把不是果的当成果。当他这样把不是道的当成道、把不是果的当成果时,他的观行路线就已经偏离了。他丢下自己的观行过程,要么陷入散乱,要么对那光明生起贪爱、邪见、我慢等种种执取,就停在那里了。不过这种光明,在不同比丘那里出现的范围并不一样:有的比丘,它只照亮结跏趺坐的那一小块地方;有的比丘,照亮屋内;有的比丘,连屋外也照亮;有的比丘,照亮整座寺院;有的比丘,照亮一牛吼地、半由旬、一由旬、二由旬……有的比丘,从地面一直到阿迦尼吒梵天界,全都照成一片光明。而世尊的光明生起时,则照亮一万个世界。这种光明,即使是在具备四种要素的黑暗中,也能把那个地方照亮而出现。
6. Dhammuddhaccavāre aniccato manasikaroto obhāso uppajjatīti udayabbayānupassanāya ṭhitassa tīhi anupassanāhi punappunaṃ saṅkhāre vipassantassa vipassantassa vipassanāñāṇesu paripākagatesu tadaṅgavasena kilesappahānena parisuddhacittassa aniccato vā dukkhato vā anattato vā manasikārakkhaṇe vipassanāñāṇānubhāvena pakatiyāva obhāso uppajjatīti paṭhamaṃ tāva aniccato manasikaroto obhāso kathito. Akusalo vipassako tasmiṃ obhāse uppanne ‘‘na ca vata me ito pubbe evarūpo obhāso uppannapubbo, addhā maggaṃ pattomhi, phalaṃ pattomhī’’ti amaggaṃyeva ‘‘maggo’’ti, aphalameva ‘‘phala’’nti gaṇhāti. Tassa amaggaṃ ‘‘maggo’’ti, aphalaṃ ‘‘phala’’nti gaṇhato vipassanāvīthi ukkantā hoti. So attano vipassanāvīthiṃ vissajjetvā vikkhepamāpanno vā obhāsameva taṇhādiṭṭhimaññanāhi maññamāno vā nisīdati. So kho panāyaṃ obhāso kassaci bhikkhuno pallaṅkaṭṭhānamattameva obhāsento uppajjati, kassaci antogabbhaṃ, kassaci bahigabbhampi, kassaci sakalavihāraṃ, gāvutaṃ aḍḍhayojanaṃ yojanaṃ dviyojanaṃ…pe… kassaci pathavitalato yāva akaniṭṭhabrahmalokā ekālokaṃ kurumāno. Bhagavato pana dasasahassilokadhātuṃ obhāsento udapādi. Ayañhi obhāso caturaṅgasamannāgatepi andhakāre taṃ taṃ ṭhānaṃ obhāsento uppajjati.
光明是法,意思是:他把光明作意为法,认为这光明是道法或果法,于是对种种光明作意。由此产生的散乱就是掉举。也就是说,从光明是法这样的作意,或者从这种作意本身所产生的散乱,就叫做掉举。他的心被这种掉举所扰乱,意思是:他的心被这样生起的掉举所对抗,或者因为这种掉举作为原因,生起了以它为根源的烦恼,他的心就被这些烦恼所对抗。这位观行者进入观修的道路后,因为停留在散乱中,或者停留在以掉举为根源的烦恼中,所以不能如实了知诸行是无常、苦、无我这些所缘。应当这样连接“iti”这个词:因此称为“其心被法掉举所扰乱”。有这样的时刻,意思是:如果这位瑜伽行者,即使心因为贪著滋味而受到染污,只要他生起审察,他就会这样了知:观是以诸行为所缘,道和果是以涅槃为所缘,而这些心是以诸行为所缘,所以这光明不是道,只有生灭随观才是通向涅槃的世间道。他这样辨明道与非道之后,避开那种散乱,安住在生灭随观上,好好地观察诸行为无常、苦、无我。对于这样审察的人,就有这样的时刻。如果不能这样观察,他就会生起增上慢,认为自己已经证得道果。
Obhāso dhammoti obhāsaṃ āvajjatīti ayaṃ obhāso maggadhammo phaladhammoti vā taṃ taṃ obhāsaṃ manasi karoti. Tato vikkhepo uddhaccanti tato obhāsato dhammoti āvajjanakaraṇato vā yo uppajjati vikkhepo, so uddhaccaṃ nāmāti attho. Tena uddhaccena viggahitamānasoti tena evaṃ uppajjamānena uddhaccena virodhitacitto, tena vā uddhaccena kāraṇabhūtena tammūlakakilesuppattiyā virodhitacitto vipassako vipassanāvīthiṃ okkamitvā vikkhepaṃ vā tammūlakakilesesu vā ṭhitattā aniccato dukkhato anattato upaṭṭhānāni yathābhūtaṃ nappajānāti. ‘‘Tena vuccati dhammuddhaccaviggahitamānaso’’ti evaṃ iti-saddo yojetabbo. Hoti so samayoti evaṃ assādavasena upakkiliṭṭhacittassāpi yogino sace upaparikkhā uppajjati, so evaṃ pajānāti – ‘‘vipassanā nāma saṅkhārārammaṇā, maggaphalāni nibbānārammaṇāni, imāni ca cittāni saṅkhārārammaṇāni, tasmā nāyamobhāso maggo, udayabbayānupassanāyeva nibbānassa lokiko maggo’’ti maggāmaggaṃ vavatthapetvā taṃ vikkhepaṃ parivajjayitvā udayabbayānupassanāya ṭhatvā sādhukaṃ saṅkhāre aniccato dukkhato anattato vipassati. Evaṃ upaparikkhantassa so samayo hoti. Evaṃ apassanto pana ‘‘maggaphalappattomhī’’ti adhimāniko hoti.
那时,那心就是那观行之心。所谓“唯内”,是说只以无常随观的所缘为行境,只在内在。所谓“智生起”,是说当那位瑜伽行者衡量、审察色法与非色法时,观智就像帝释掷出的金刚杵一样,以不可阻挡之势,锐利、迅猛、极其清净地生起。所谓“喜生起”,是说就在那时,与观相应的五种喜——小喜、刹那喜、继起喜、踊跃喜、遍满喜——遍满全身而生起。所谓“轻安生起”,是说就在那时,他的身心没有不安、沉重、僵硬、不适业、病态和扭曲;相反,他的身心变得轻安、轻快、柔软、适业、练达、极清净而正直。他依着这些轻安等素质的滋养,就在那时体验到一种叫做“非人喜乐”的乐。对此,有偈颂说:
Yaṃ taṃ cittanti yaṃ taṃ vipassanācittaṃ. Ajjhattamevāti aniccānupassanāya ārammaṇe gocarajjhatteyeva. Ñāṇaṃ uppajjatīti tasseva yogāvacarassa rūpārūpadhamme tulayantassa tīrayantassa vissaṭṭhaindavajiramiva avihatavegaṃ tikhiṇaṃ sūramativisadaṃ vipassanāñāṇaṃ uppajjati. Pīti uppajjatīti tasseva tasmiṃ samaye khuddikā pīti, khaṇikā pīti, okkantikā pīti, ubbegā pīti, pharaṇā pītīti ayaṃ pañcavidhā vipassanāsampayuttā pīti sakalasarīraṃ pūrayamānā uppajjati. Passaddhi uppajjatīti tasseva tasmiṃ samaye kāyacittānaṃ neva daratho, na gāravatā, na kakkhaḷatā , na akammaññatā, na gelaññatā, na vaṅkatā hoti. Atha kho panassa kāyacittāni passaddhāni lahūni mudūni kammaññāni paguṇāni suvisadāni ujukāniyeva honti. So imehi passaddhādīhi anuggahitakāyacitto tasmiṃ samaye amānusiṃ nāma ratiṃ anubhavati. Yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ –
已经进入空寂之处的比丘,内心寂静,
正确观照法的人,会生起一种不是人间所有的喜乐。
每当如实观照诸蕴的生起与坏灭,
他获得喜悦与欢欣,这就是有智慧的人所体证的不死境界。
‘‘Suññāgāraṃ paviṭṭhassa, santacittassa bhikkhuno; Amānusī ratī hoti, sammā dhammaṃ vipassato. ‘‘Yato yato sammasati, khandhānaṃ udayabbayaṃ; Labhatī pītipāmojjaṃ, amataṃ taṃ vijānata’’nti. (dha. pa. 373-4) –
他这样成就这种非凡的乐时,与观相应、伴随轻快等品质的身轻安和心轻安就会生起。乐生起:就在那一刻,与观相应的乐流遍全身而生起。胜解生起:就在那一刻,作为心与心所极其清净之体的、与观相应的信生起。策励生起:就在那一刻,既不过松也不过紧、被善加策励的、与观相应的精进生起。现起生起:就在那一刻,善得现前、善得安住、深植不动、如雪山王一般的、与观相应的念生起。他无论转向、注意、作意、观察哪个所缘,那个所缘都进入并跃入他的念中,就像有天眼的人看见他世一样,清晰地呈现在他面前。
Evamassa imaṃ amānusiṃ ratiṃ sādhayamānā lahutādīhi sahitā vipassanāsampayuttā kāyacittapassaddhi uppajjati. Sukhaṃ uppajjatīti tasseva tasmiṃ samaye sakalasarīraṃ abhisandayamānaṃ vipassanāsampayuttaṃ sukhaṃ uppajjati. Adhimokkho uppajjatīti tasseva tasmiṃ samaye cittacetasikānaṃ atisayapasādabhūtā vipassanāsampayuttā saddhā uppajjati. Paggaho uppajjatīti tasseva tasmiṃ samaye asithilamanaccāraddhaṃ supaggahitaṃ vipassanāsampayuttaṃ vīriyaṃ uppajjati. Upaṭṭhānaṃ uppajjatīti tasseva tasmiṃ samaye sūpaṭṭhitā suppatiṭṭhitā nikhātā acalā pabbatarājasadisā vipassanāsampayuttā sati uppajjati. So yaṃ yaṃ ṭhānaṃ āvajjati samannāharati manasi karoti paccavekkhati, taṃ taṃ ṭhānamassa okkantitvā pakkhanditvā dibbacakkhuno paraloko viya satiyā upaṭṭhāti (visuddhi. 2.734).
“舍”是指观舍和转向舍。因为在那一刻,对于一切诸行处于中立状态的观舍也会强有力地生起,意门中的转向舍也会生起。对于正在逐一转向那个所缘的他来说,那转向舍就像帝释天掷出的霹雳,又像射入叶鞘的箭,变得迅捷、锐利而运作。这是《清净道论》中所说的。在这里,有些老师把“与观相应的彼处中舍性”称为观舍。因为在提到“智生起”时,已经说到了观智,如果再说观舍,就会有重复的过失。而且在第三禅那的解释中也说:“行舍与观舍在意义上是一体的,它就是慧,只是按作用分为两种。”因此,说“与观相应的彼处中舍性”,既没有重复的过失,也与第三禅那的解释相符。再者,在五根中,已经用“智、胜解、策励、现起”指出了慧根、信根、精进根、念根,而定根还没有被指出,而按照双运的方式,定根也是必须被指出的。所以应当知道,这里所说的“舍”,是指已经平等安住的定,因为它具有舍弃再度安立之作用的功能,所以被称为“舍”。
Upekkhāti vipassanupekkhā ceva āvajjanupekkhā ca. Tasmiñhi samaye sabbasaṅkhāresu majjhattabhūtā vipassanupekkhāpi balavatī uppajjati, manodvāre āvajjanupekkhāpi. Sā hissa taṃ taṃ ṭhānaṃ āvajjantassa vissaṭṭhaindavajiramiva pattapuṭe pakkhandatattanārāco viya ca sūrā tikhiṇā hutvā vahati . Evañhi visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 2.734) vuttaṃ. Vipassanupekkhāti cettha ‘‘vipassanāsampayuttā tatramajjhattupekkhā’’ti ācariyā vadanti. Vipassanāñāṇe hi gayhamāne ‘‘ñāṇaṃ uppajjatī’’ti vipassanāñāṇassa āgatattā punaruttidoso hoti. Tatiyajjhānavaṇṇanāyañca ‘‘saṅkhārupekkhāvipassanupekkhānampi atthato ekībhāvo. Paññā eva hi sā, kiccavasena dvidhā bhinnā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tasmā vipassanāsampayuttāya tatramajjhattupekkhāya vuccamānāya punaruttidoso ca na hoti, tatiyajjhānavaṇṇanāya ca sameti. Yasmā ca pañcasu indriyesu ‘‘ñāṇaṃ adhimokkho paggaho upaṭṭhāna’’nti paññindriyasaddhindriyavīriyindriyasatindriyāni niddiṭṭhāni, samādhindriyaṃ pana aniddiṭṭhaṃ hoti, yuganaddhavasenāpi ca samādhindriyaṃ niddisitabbameva hoti, tasmā samappavatto samādhi puna samādhāne byāpārappahānakaraṇena ‘‘upekkhā’’ti vuttoti veditabbaṃ.
“爱欲生起”:当观法被光明等装饰得如此美好时,如果对它产生执著,一种微细、寂静的爱欲就会生起,这种爱欲甚至无法被认作烦恼。就像在光明中一样,当这些情况中任何一种生起时,那位修行者如果这样想:“我从前从未生起过这样的智,从未生起过这样的喜、轻安、乐、胜解、策励、现起、舍、爱欲。我肯定已经证得道了,已经证得果了。”他就会把不是道的执取为“道”,把不是果的执取为“果”。当他这样执取时,他的观行之路就偏离了。他放弃了自己的根本业处,只是坐在那里沉湎于那种爱欲。在这里,光明等因为是随染的所依事,所以被称为“随染”,并不是因为它们本身是不善的。而爱欲既是随染,也是随染的所依事。这些随染,按所依事来说只有十种,但按执取的方式来说,则有三十种。怎么会有三十种呢?如果执取“我的光明生起了”,就生起了见执;如果执取“这光明真可爱啊”,就生起了慢执;如果对光明产生味著,就生起了爱执。这样,对于光明,因为见、慢、爱而有三种执取。对于其余的也这样类推。因此,按执取的方式,共有三十种随染。在“当他作意苦时”“当他作意无我时”等段落中,也应该用这个道理来理解其含义。在这里应当知道:依一一随观,各各的观随染生起,而非仅对一人。
Nikantiuppajjatīti evaṃ obhāsādipaṭimaṇḍitāya vipassanāya ālayaṃ kurumānā sukhumā santākārā nikanti uppajjati, yā kilesoti pariggahetumpi na sakkā hoti. Yathā ca obhāse, evaṃ etesupi aññatarasmiṃ uppanne yogāvacaro ‘‘na ca vata me ito pubbe evarūpaṃ ñāṇaṃ uppannapubbaṃ, evarūpā pīti passaddhi sukhaṃ adhimokkho paggaho upaṭṭhānaṃ upekkhā nikanti uppannapubbā, addhā maggaṃ pattomhi, phalaṃ pattomhī’’ti amaggameva ‘‘maggo’’ti, aphalameva ‘‘phala’’nti gaṇhāti. Tassa amaggaṃ ‘‘maggo’’ti, aphalañca ‘‘phala’’nti gaṇhato vipassanāvīthi ukkantā hoti. So attano mūlakammaṭṭhānaṃ vissajjetvā nikantimeva assādento nisīdati. Ettha ca obhāsādayo upakkilesavatthutāya upakkilesāti vuttā, na akusalattā. Nikanti pana upakkileso ceva upakkilesavatthu ca. Vatthuvaseneva cete dasa, gāhavasena pana samatiṃsa honti. Kathaṃ? ‘‘Mama obhāso uppanno’’ti gaṇhato hi diṭṭhiggāho hoti, ‘‘manāpo vata obhāso uppanno’’ti gaṇhato mānaggāho, obhāsaṃ assādayato taṇhāggāho. Iti obhāse diṭṭhimānataṇhāvasena tayo gāhā. Tathā sesesupīti evaṃ gāhavasena samatiṃsa upakkilesā honti. Dukkhato manasikaroto, anattato manasikarototi vāresupi imināva nayena attho veditabbo. Ekekaanupassanāvasena hettha ekekassa vipassanupakkilesuppatti veditabbā, na ekasseva.
在三种随观当中。像这样,先不分别,从观的角度说明了随烦恼;接着再分别说明时,就说了“当他作意色为无常时”等话。其中,“老死以无常的方式现起”,就是老死以无常的方式呈现。
Tīsu anupassanāsu. Evaṃ abhedato vipassanāvasena upakkilese dassetvā puna bhedavasena dassento rūpaṃ aniccato manasikarototiādimāha. Tattha jarāmaraṇaṃ aniccato upaṭṭhānanti jarāmaraṇassa aniccato upaṭṭhānaṃ.
7因为先前所说的三十种随烦恼,不善巧、不熟练的瑜伽行者会在光明等(禅相)上动摇,对光明等一一都看作“这是我的,这是我,这是我的自我”,所以为了说明这个道理,说了“于光明与智……”这两首偈颂。其中,“动摇”是指在光明等所缘上,由于各种烦恼而种种地震动、颤动。“由于这些,心颤动”是指由于那些轻安与快乐,心因为各种烦恼而以种种方式颤动、震动。因此应当理解其关联是:瑜伽行者在轻安与快乐上也会动摇。“于舍的转向”是指于被称为舍的转向(作意)上动摇,意思就是于转向舍上动摇。不过在《清净道论》中说的是“于舍的转向”。而“于舍”是指于上文所说的那种舍上动摇,也是在贪求上动摇,意思就是如此。这里因为指出了两种舍,所以在上文“舍生起”的地方也说了两种含义。在“无常随观”等中,因为每一种都只是转向舍,所以每一种随观都反复修习为“无常、无常,苦、苦,无我、无我”,这就是所说的意思。然而,因为善巧、有智慧、熟练、具足智慧的瑜伽行者,在光明等生起时,以智慧这样限定、审察它:“这光明确实在我这里生起了,而它确实是无常的、有为的、缘生的、灭尽法、衰灭法、离贪法、灭法。”或者,他这样想:如果光明是我,那么执取为“我”才合理;然而这光明是被执取为“我”的无我。因此,他见到它以不自在之义为无我,便去除邪见。如果光明是常,那么执取为“常”才合理;然而这光明是被执取为“常”的无常。因此,他见到它以生已还归于无之义为无常,便连根拔除我慢。如果光明是乐,那么执取为“乐”才合理;然而这光明是被执取为“乐”的苦。因此,他见到它以生灭逼迫之义为苦,便耗尽贪爱。如于光明,于其余诸法也是如此。
7. Yasmā pubbe vuttānaṃ samatiṃsāya upakkilesānaṃ vasena akusalo abyatto yogāvacaro obhāsādīsu vikampati, obhāsādīsu ekekaṃ ‘‘etaṃ mama, esohamasmi, eso me attā’’ti samanupassati, tasmā tamatthaṃ dassento obhāse ceva ñāṇe cātiādigāthādvayamāha. Tattha vikampatīti obhāsādike ārammaṇe nānākilesavasena vividhā kampati vedhati. Yehi cittaṃ pavedhatīti yehi passaddhisukhehi cittaṃ nānākilesavasena nānappakārena vedhati kampati. Tasmā passaddhiyā sukhe ceva yogāvacaro vikampatīti sambandho veditabbo. Upekkhāvajjanāya cevāti upekkhāsaṅkhātāya āvajjanāya ceva vikampati, āvajjanupekkhāya ceva vikampatīti attho. Visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 2.736) pana ‘‘upekkhāvajjanāyañcā’’ti vuttaṃ. Upekkhāya cāti heṭṭhā vuttappakārāya upekkhāya ca vikampati, nikantiyā ca vikampatīti attho. Ettha ca dvinnaṃ upekkhānaṃ niddiṭṭhattā heṭṭhā ‘‘upekkhā uppajjatī’’ti vuttaṭṭhāne ca ubhayathā attho vutto. Aniccānupassanādīsu ca ekekissāyeva āvajjanupekkhāya sabbhāvato ekekāyeva anupassanā aniccaṃ aniccaṃ, dukkhaṃ dukkhaṃ, anattā anattāti punappunaṃ bhāvīyatīti vuttaṃ hoti. Yasmā pana kusalo paṇḍito byatto buddhisampanno yogāvacaro obhāsādīsu uppannesu ‘‘ayaṃ kho me obhāso uppanno, so kho panāyaṃ anicco saṅkhato paṭiccasamuppanno khayadhammo vayadhammo virāgadhammo nirodhadhammo’’ti iti vā naṃ paññāya paricchindati upaparikkhati. Atha vā panassa evaṃ hoti – sace obhāso attā bhaveyya, ‘‘attā’’ti gahetuṃ vaṭṭeyya. Anattāva panāyaṃ ‘‘attā’’ti gahito. Tasmāyaṃ avasavattanaṭṭhena anattāti passanto diṭṭhiṃ ugghāṭeti. Sace obhāso nicco bhaveyya, ‘‘nicco’’ti gahetuṃ vaṭṭeyya. Aniccova panāyaṃ ‘‘nicco’’ti gahito. Tasmāyaṃ hutvā abhāvaṭṭhena aniccoti passanto mānaṃ samugghāṭeti. Sace obhāso sukho bhaveyya, ‘‘sukho’’ti gahetuṃ vaṭṭeyya. Dukkhova panāyaṃ ‘‘sukho’’ti gahito. Tasmāyaṃ uppādavayapaṭipīḷanaṭṭhena dukkhoti passanto nikantiṃ pariyādiyati. Yathā ca obhāse, evaṃ sesesupi.
这样审察之后,他把光明看作“这不是我的,我不是这个,这不是我的我”。对智……乃至对贪爱,也同样看作“这不是我的,我不是这个,这不是我的我”。这样观照时,他对光明等不再动摇,不再震颤。因此,为了说明这个道理,他说出了“这十种处”这个偈颂。其中,“十种处”就是指光明等。“以慧熟悉”:是指以脱离了随烦恼的慧,反复接触、反复修习它们,对它们极为熟悉。“善巧于法掉举”:那位以慧熟悉十种处的修行者,因为如实通达前面所说的那种法掉举,所以成为善巧者。“且不走向迷乱”:正因为善巧于法掉举,他通过摧破贪爱、我慢和邪见,不再走向迷乱。
Evaṃ upaparikkhitvā obhāsaṃ ‘‘netaṃ mama, nesohamasmi, na meso attā’’ti samanupassati. Ñāṇaṃ…pe… nikantiṃ ‘‘netaṃ mama, nesohamasmi, na meso attā’’ti samanupassati. Evaṃ samanupassanto obhāsādīsu na kampati na vedhati. Tasmā tamatthaṃ dassento imāni dasa ṭhānānīti gāthamāha. Tattha dasa ṭhānānīti obhāsādīni. Paññā yassa pariccitāti yassa upakkilesavimuttāya paññāya paricitāni punappunaṃ phuṭṭhāni paribhāvitāni. Dhammuddhaccakusalo hotīti so paññāya paricitadasaṭṭhāno yogāvacaro pubbe vuttappakārassa dhammuddhaccassa yathāsabhāvapaṭivedhena cheko hoti. Na ca sammoha gacchatīti dhammuddhaccakusalattāyeva taṇhāmānadiṭṭhugghāṭavasena sammohañca na gacchati.
现在,为了用另一种方式说明前面已经讲过的道理,而说出“散乱并且被染污”等偈颂。在这里,钝慧的瑜伽修行者在光明等境界中,既遭遇散乱,也生起其余烦恼。中慧的人只遭遇散乱,不会生起其余烦恼,他变成增上慢的人。利慧的人虽然遭遇散乱,但能舍弃那种增上慢,开始修观。极利慧的人不会遭遇散乱,也不会生起其余烦恼。“散乱并且被染污”:在他们当中,钝慧的人陷入被称为“法掉举”的散乱,同时被染污,也就是被渴爱、慢、见等烦恼所染污,意思是他受到折磨、被逼迫、被损害。“心修习退堕”:那个钝慧者的观心修习退堕了,因为停留在烦恼中、被对立面所破坏,意思是崩溃、无法安住。“散乱而不染污”:中慧的人因散乱而散乱,但不被烦恼染污。“修习衰退”:那个中慧的人因为增上慢,不开始修观,所以他的观衰退,也就是不再运作。“散乱而不染污”:利慧的人也因散乱而散乱,但不被烦恼染污。“修习不衰退”:那个利慧的人虽然还有散乱,但能舍弃那种增上慢的散乱,具备开始修观的条件,所以他的观修习不衰退,也就是能持续运作。“心不散乱也不染污”:极利慧者的心不因散乱而散乱,也不被烦恼染污。“心修习不退堕”:他的观心修习不退堕,因为没有散乱和烦恼,所以安住在应当安住的状态,这就是其中的意思。
Idāni pubbe vuttameva vidhiṃ aparena pariyāyena vibhāvetvā dassento vikkhipati ceva kilissati cātiādigāthamāha. Tattha mandapañño yogāvacaro obhāsādīsu vikkhepañca avasesakilesuppattiñca pāpuṇāti. Majjhimapañño vikkhepameva pāpuṇāti, nāvasesakilesuppattiṃ, so adhimāniko hoti. Tikkhapañño vikkhepaṃ pāpuṇitvāpi taṃ adhimānaṃ pahāya vipassanaṃ ārabhati. Atitikkhapañño na vikkhepaṃ pāpuṇāti, na cāvasesakilesuppattiṃ. Vikkhippati cevāti tesu mandapañño dhammuddhaccasaṅkhātaṃ vikkhepañceva pāpuṇīyati. Kilissati cāti taṇhāmānadiṭṭhikilesehi kilesīyati ca, upatāpīyati vibādhīyatīti attho. Cavati cittabhāvanāti tassa mandapaññassa vipassanācittabhāvanā kilesesuyeva ṭhānato paṭipakkhāvihatattā cavati, paripatatīti attho. Vikkhipati na kilissatīti majjhimapañño vikkhepena vikkhipati, kilesehi na kilissati. Bhāvanā parihāyatīti tassa majjhimapaññassa adhimānikattā vipassanārambhābhāvena vipassanā parihāyati, nappavattatīti attho. Vikkhipati na kilissatīti tikkhapaññopi vikkhepena vikkhipati, kilesehi na kilissati. Bhāvanā na parihāyatīti tassa tikkhapaññassa santepi vikkhepe taṃ adhimānavikkhepaṃ pahāya vipassanārambhasabbhāvena vipassanābhāvanā na parihāyati, pavattatīti attho. Na ca vikkhipate cittaṃ na kilissatīti atitikkhapaññassa cittaṃ na vikkhepena vikkhipati, na ca kilesehi kilissati. Na cavati cittabhāvanāti tassa vipassanācittabhāvanā na cavati, vikkhepakilesābhāvena yathāṭhāne tiṭṭhatīti attho.
对于“以这四种处”等句,应该结合上下文来理解它的义理注释:以现在所说的这四种处作为因,或者作为条件,对于光明等十种处,心被简略和散乱这两种状态所影响。第四种善良、有大智慧的瑜伽修行者,已经远离了散乱和烦恼的生起,他能以种种方式如实了知钝慧等三种瑜伽修行者的心是这样或那样的状态。这里所说的“简略”,应当理解为心因为散乱和烦恼的生起而变得低沉。“散乱”则应当依据“散乱而不染污”那两处所说的散乱,理解为心变得高举、散动。
Imehi catūhi ṭhānehītiādīsu idāni vuttehi imehi catūhi ṭhānehi hetubhūtehi, karaṇabhūtehi vā obhāsādike dasa ṭhāne cittassa saṅkhepena ca vikkhepena ca viggahitaṃ mānasaṃ vikkhepakilesuppattivirahito catuttho kusalo mahāpañño yogāvacaro mandapaññādīnaṃ tiṇṇaṃ yogāvacarānaṃ mānasaṃ evañca evañca hotīti nānappakārato jānātīti sambandhato atthavaṇṇanā veditabbā. Saṅkhepoti cettha vikkhepassa ceva kilesānañca uppattivasena cittassa līnabhāvo veditabbo. Vikkhepoti ‘‘vikkhipati na kilissatī’’ti dvīsu ṭhānesu vuttavikkhepavasena cittassa uddhatabhāvo veditabboti.
对“谛说”的注释
Saccakathāvaṇṇanā
8现在,为了说明藉双运功德的圣道之力、谛义、证悟谛的殊胜以及谛相等种种分类,对前面以经教为先导所讲的谛说,作进一步阐明其未显之义。其中,先说经教里的内容:“真如”,是指按如实的状态而真实不虚。因为那些如实存在的诸法,从谛的意义上来说就是谛。谛的意义,在最初解说智的注释中已经讲过。“无虚妄”,是指在所说的自性上没有颠倒错乱,因为谛不可能变成虚假。“无变异”,是指没有其他自性,因为虚假的东西不可能成为谛。经文说:“比丘们,这是苦。”比丘们,所谓“这是苦”,因为它如实而存在,所以是真如——苦就是苦;因为在所说的自性上没有颠倒,所以是无虚妄——苦绝不会变成非苦;因为没有其他自性,所以是无变异——苦绝不会变成集等其他自性。对于集、灭、道,也是同样的道理。
8. Idāni yuganaddhaguṇassa ariyamaggassa vasena saccaṭṭhaṃ saccapaṭivedhavisesaṃ saccalakkhaṇādividhānañca dassentena kathitāya suttantapubbaṅgamāya saccakathāya apubbatthānuvaṇṇanā. Tattha suttante tāva tathānīti yathāsabhāvavasena tacchāni. Yathāsabhāvabhūtāneva hi dhammajātāni saccaṭṭhena saccāni. Saccaṭṭho paṭhamañāṇaniddesavaṇṇanāyaṃ vutto. Avitathānīti vuttasabhāve vipariyāyavirahitāni. Na hi saccāni asaccāni nāma honti. Anaññathānīti aññasabhāvavirahitāni. Na hi asaccāni saccāni nāma honti. Idaṃ dukkhanti, bhikkhave, tathametanti bhikkhave, idaṃ dukkhanti yaṃ vuccati, etaṃ yathāsabhāvattā tathaṃ. Dukkhameva hi dukkhaṃ. Vuttasabhāve vipariyāyābhāvato avitathaṃ. Na hi dukkhaṃ adukkhaṃ nāma hoti. Aññasabhāvavirahitattā anaññathaṃ. Na hi dukkhaṃ samudayādisabhāvaṃ hoti. Samudayādīsupi eseva nayo.
第一经解说的注释
1. Paṭhamasuttantaniddesavaṇṇanā
“以如是义”就是“以如实自性之义”。至于逼迫等含义,在《智论》里已经讲过了,这里不再重复。
Tathaṭṭhenāti yathāsabhāvaṭṭhena. Pīḷanaṭṭhādayo ñāṇakathāyaṃ vuttatthāyeva.
9一贯通达:以一道智通达,或者这些法被一次通达,所以叫一贯通达。以无我义:因为四圣谛都没有自我,所以是以无我义。这在《清净道论》里确实说过:从究竟义来看,一切圣谛都因为没有感受者、没有造作者、没有寂灭者、没有行者的缘故,应当知道它们是空的。因此这样说:
9.Ekappaṭivedhānīti ekena maggañāṇena paṭivedho, ekato vā paṭivedho etesanti ekappaṭivedhāni. Anattaṭṭhenāti catunnampi saccānaṃ attavirahitattā anattaṭṭhena. Vuttañhetaṃ visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 2.567) – paramatthato hi sabbāneva saccāni vedakakārakanibbutagamakābhāvato suññānīti veditabbāni. Tenetaṃ vuccati –
确实只有苦,而没有谁在受苦;没有造作者,只存在行为本身。
有寂灭,但没有寂灭的人;有道路,但不存在行走的人。
‘‘Dukkhameva hi, na koci dukkhito, kārako na, kiriyāva vijjati; Atthi nibbuti, na nibbuto pumā, maggamatthi, gamako na vijjatī’’ti. (visuddhi. 2.567);
常、净、乐之我皆空,前二唯空,此即不死之道;
道远离常、乐、我,因此对它们来说就是空性。
‘‘Dhuvasubhasukhattasuññaṃ, purimadvayamattasuññamamatapadaṃ; Dhuvasukhaattavirahito, maggo iti suññatā tesū’’ti. (visuddhi. 2.567);
“以谛义”是指不欺诳的意义。“以通达义”是指在道刹那应当被通达的意义。“被一义所摄”是指被如义等每一个意义各自所摄,也就是进入同一计数的意思。凡是被一个意义所摄的,就是“单一性”;因为是被一个意义所摄,所以就是单一性的意思。虽然诸谛有多种,但着眼于单一性,所以用了单数。所谓“他以一智通达单一性”,是指在加行阶段,如实安立四圣谛的种种单一性并安住其中,然后在道刹那以一道智通达如义等各自的单一性。怎样通达呢?当灭谛的如义等单一性被通达时,其余诸谛的如义等单一性也就同样被通达了。就像在加行阶段,如实安立五蕴的种种单一性并安住其中的人,在道出起时,若观无常、或苦、或无我而出起,那么当在一个蕴上见到无常等时,其余诸蕴也必定见到无常等,应当这样理解。苦的苦义就是如义:苦谛的逼迫义等四种义,以自性而言就是如义。其余诸谛也是如此。这同样的四种义,因为远离我体,所以是无我义。因为所述自性不欺诳,所以是谛义。因为在道刹那应当被通达,所以是通达义。应当知道,以上就是所说的内容。
Saccaṭṭhenāti avisaṃvādakaṭṭhena. Paṭivedhaṭṭhenāti maggakkhaṇe paṭivijjhitabbaṭṭhena. Ekasaṅgahitānīti tathaṭṭhādinā ekekeneva atthena saṅgahitāni, ekagaṇanaṃ gatānīti attho. Yaṃ ekasaṅgahitaṃ, taṃ ekattanti yasmā ekena saṅgahitaṃ, tasmā ekattanti attho. Saccānaṃ bahuttepi ekattamapekkhitvā ekavacanaṃ kataṃ. Ekattaṃ ekena ñāṇena paṭivijjhatīti pubbabhāge catunnaṃ saccānaṃ nānattekattaṃ svāvatthitaṃ vavatthapetvā ṭhito maggakkhaṇe ekena maggañāṇena tathaṭṭhāditaṃtaṃekattaṃ paṭivijjhati. Kathaṃ? Nirodhasaccassa tathaṭṭhādike ekatte paṭividdhe sesasaccānampi tathaṭṭhādikaṃ ekattaṃ paṭividdhameva hoti. Yathā pubbabhāge pañcannaṃ khandhānaṃ nānattekattaṃ svāvatthitaṃ vavatthapetvā ṭhitassa maggavuṭṭhānakāle aniccato vā dukkhato vā anattato vā vuṭṭhahantassa ekasmimpi khandhe aniccādito diṭṭhe sesakhandhāpi aniccādito diṭṭhāva honti, evamidanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Dukkhassa dukkhaṭṭho tathaṭṭhoti dukkhasaccassa pīḷanaṭṭhādiko catubbidho attho sabhāvaṭṭhena tathaṭṭho. Sesasaccesupi eseva nayo. Soyeva catubbidho attho attābhāvato anattaṭṭho. Vuttasabhāve avisaṃvādakato saccaṭṭho. Maggakkhaṇe paṭivijjhitabbato paṭivedhaṭṭho vuttoti veditabbaṃ.
10“无常等”这一句,是先以共相作为引导来开示的。其中,凡是无常的,就是苦;凡是苦的,就是无常——这样就摄入了苦谛、集谛和道谛。因为这三谛既是无常的,又由于无常的缘故而是苦。凡是无常并且是苦的,就是无我——这样就同样摄入了这三谛。凡是无常、是苦、是无我的——由这三者连同灭谛一起被包含进来。因为四谛全都是无我。“这就是如”是指这四谛组是真实自性。“这就是谛”是指这四谛组如其自性而不虚诳。在“以九种行相”等句中,应当知道:依据“诸比丘,一切应证知”的说法,以证知义来说;以遍知义——因为苦有遍知义;以断义——因为集有断义;以修习义——因为道有修习义;以作证义——因为灭有作证义;即使各别来说,在此四谛中,由于有知遍知的存在,所以以遍知义来说;由于有见四谛而断的存在,所以以断义来说;由于有四谛修习的存在,所以以修习义来说;由于有四谛作证的存在,所以以作证义来说。在“以九种行相、以如义等”中,应当按照最初所说的方式来贯通理解。
10.Yaṃ aniccantiādi sāmaññalakkhaṇapubbaṅgamaṃ katvā dassitaṃ. Tattha yaṃ aniccaṃ, taṃ dukkhaṃ. Yaṃ dukkhaṃ, taṃ aniccanti dukkhasamudayamaggā gahitā. Tāni hi tīṇi saccāni aniccāni ceva aniccattā dukkhāni ca. Yaṃ aniccañca dukkhañca, taṃ anattāti tāniyeva tīṇi gahitāni. Yaṃ aniccañca dukkhañca anattā cāti tehi tīhi saha nirodhasaccañca saṅgahitaṃ. Cattāripi hi anattāyeva. Taṃ tathanti taṃ saccacatukkaṃ sabhāvabhūtaṃ. Taṃ saccanti tadeva saccacatukkaṃ yathāsabhāve avisaṃvādakaṃ. Navahākārehītiādīsu ‘‘sabbaṃ, bhikkhave, abhiññeyya’’nti (paṭi. ma. 1.3; saṃ. ni. 4.46) vacanato abhiññaṭṭhena, dukkhassa pariññaṭṭhe, samudayassa pahānaṭṭhe, maggassa bhāvanaṭṭhe, nirodhassa sacchikiriyaṭṭhe āvenikepi idha catūsupi saccesu ñātapariññāsabbhāvato pariññaṭṭhena, catusaccadassanena pahānasabbhāvato pahānaṭṭhena, catusaccabhāvanāsabbhāvato bhāvanaṭṭhena, catunnaṃ saccānaṃ sacchikiriyasabbhāvato sacchikiriyaṭṭhenāti niddiṭṭhanti veditabbaṃ. Navahākārehi tathaṭṭhenātiādīsu paṭhamaṃ vuttanayeneva yojanā kātabbā.
11在“以十二种行相”等句中,“如义”等说法在《智论》里已经解释过了。解释这些内容时,也应当按前面说过的方式来理解贯通。
11.Dvādasahi ākārehītiādīsu tathaṭṭhādayo ñāṇakathāyaṃ vuttatthā. Etesaṃ niddesepi vuttanayeneva yojanā veditabbā.
12在“诸谛有多少种相”等句中,下文应当说的六种相,按有为和无为分成两类,所以说“两种相”。其中,有为相和无为相,就是经里所说的:“比丘们,有为有三种有为相:生起可以被知道,灭去可以被知道,住立时的变异可以被知道。比丘们,无为有三种无为相:生起不可以被知道,灭去不可以被知道,住立时的变异不可以被知道。”(《增支部》3.47-48)如此所说的有为法的“有为”相以及无为法的“无为”相。不过,有为法不是相,相也不是有为法。没有有为法,就无法说明相;没有相,也无法说明有为法。然而,正是通过相,有为法才得以显现。
12.Saccānaṃ kati lakkhaṇānītiādīsu upari vattabbāni cha lakkhaṇāni saṅkhatāsaṅkhatavasena dvidhā bhinditvā dve lakkhaṇānīti āha. Tattha saṅkhatalakkhaṇañca asaṅkhatalakkhaṇañcāti ‘‘tīṇimāni, bhikkhave, saṅkhatassa saṅkhatalakkhaṇāni uppādo paññāyati, vayo paññāyati, ṭhitassa aññathattaṃ paññāyati. Tīṇimāni, bhikkhave, asaṅkhatassa asaṅkhatalakkhaṇāni na uppādo paññāyati, na vayo paññāyati, na ṭhitassa aññathattaṃ paññāyatī’’ti (a. ni. 3.47-48) evaṃ vuttaṃ saṅkhatassa saṅkhatamiti lakkhaṇañca asaṅkhatassa asaṅkhatamiti lakkhaṇañca. Saṅkhataṃ pana na lakkhaṇaṃ, lakkhaṇaṃ na saṅkhataṃ. Na ca saṅkhataṃ vinā lakkhaṇaṃ paññāpetuṃ sakkā, napi lakkhaṇaṃ vinā saṅkhataṃ. Lakkhaṇena pana saṅkhataṃ pākaṭaṃ hoti.
再进一步,为了详细说明这同一个两种相,他说“六种相”。“有为诸谛”是指苦谛、集谛和道谛。因为它们是由各种条件聚合而成的,所以是有为。“生起”就是生。“被了知”就是被知道。“灭”就是坏灭。“住立者的变异性”就是已经达到住立状态者的变异,也就是老。对于这三种有为谛,因为它们是已经完成的,所以说它们有生、灭和变异性;但生、老、灭本身并不是已经完成的,所以不应对它们说生、灭和变异性。也不能说因为依赖有为法,生、灭和变异性就不被了知。然而,因为是有为法的变化,所以应说是有为法。他们说,苦谛和集谛的生、老、灭属于谛的范畴,而道谛的生、老、灭不属于谛的范畴。其中,《蕴品注》中说:“对于有为诸法,在生起的刹那,有为法以及生的相,还有被称为时间的那个刹那,都被了知;在生起已过时,有为法以及老的相,还有被称为时间的那个刹那,都被了知;在坏灭的刹那,有为法、老以及坏的相,还有被称为时间的那个刹那,都被了知。”“无为谛”是指灭谛。因为它不是由各种条件聚合而成的,而是自然完成的,所以是无为。“住者的”是指因恒常而住立者的,并不是因为达到了住立状态。再进一步,为了详细说明这同一个两种相,他说“十二种相”。
Puna tadeva lakkhaṇadvayaṃ vitthārato dassento cha lakkhaṇānīti āha. Saṅkhatānaṃ saccānanti dukkhasamudayamaggasaccānaṃ. Tāni hi paccayehi saṅgamma katattā saṅkhatāni. Uppādoti jāti. Paññāyatīti jānīyati. Vayoti bhaṅgo. Ṭhitānaṃ aññathattanti ṭhitippattānaṃ aññathābhāvo jarā. Tiṇṇaṃ saṅkhatasaccānaṃ nipphannattā uppādavayaññathattaṃ vuttaṃ, tesaṃyeva pana uppādassa, jarāya bhaṅgassa ca anipphannattā uppādavayaññathattaṃ na vattabbaṃ. Saṅkhatanissitattā uppādavayaññathattaṃ na paññāyatīti na vattabbaṃ. Saṅkhatavikārattā pana saṅkhatanti vattabbaṃ. Dukkhasamudayānaṃ uppādajarābhaṅgā saccapariyāpannā, maggasaccassa uppādajarābhaṅgā na saccapariyāpannāti vadanti. Tattha ‘‘saṅkhatānaṃ uppādakkhaṇe saṅkhatāpi uppādalakkhaṇampi kālasaṅkhāto tassa khaṇopi paññāyati, uppāde vītivatte saṅkhatāpi jarālakkhaṇampi kālasaṅkhāto tassa khaṇopi paññāyati, bhaṅgakkhaṇe saṅkhatāpi jarāpi bhaṅgalakkhaṇampi kālasaṅkhāto tassa khaṇopi paññāyatī’’ti khandhakavaggaṭṭhakathāyaṃ (saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 2.3.37-38) vuttaṃ. Asaṅkhatassa saccassāti nirodhasaccassa. Tañhi paccayehi samāgamma akatattā sayameva nipphannanti asaṅkhataṃ. Ṭhitassāti niccattā ṭhitassa, na ṭhānappattattā. Puna tadeva lakkhaṇadvayaṃ vitthārato dassento dvādasa lakkhaṇānīti āha.
在“四谛有多少是善”等问答中,无记有四种:果报无记、作用无记、色无记、涅槃无记。这里取的是四种无记中的涅槃无记。因为四谛都不具备善与不善的特征,所以都是无记。问“可以是善吗”,是就欲界、色界、无色界的善而言,也可以有善。问“可以是不善吗”,是就不善而言,但要把渴爱除外。问“可以是无记吗”,是就欲界、色界、无色界的果报、作用以及色法而言。在“可以是三谛”等问答中,是说它们被包含、被计入其中。所谓“依事由”,是就不善、善、无记、苦、集、灭、道这些事由而言。苦谛中除了渴爱以外,其余的不善,就是不善。以不善之义,二谛由一谛所含摄:这苦谛与集谛二者,以不善之义,由一谛所含摄,也就是说,成为所谓“不善谛”。一谛由二谛所含摄:这一个不善谛,由苦谛与集谛二者所含摄。苦谛中的善,就是三界善法。这苦谛与道谛二者,以善之义,由一谛所含摄,也就是说,成为所谓“善谛”。一个善谛,由苦谛与道谛二者所含摄。苦谛中的无记,就是三界的果报、作用以及色法。这苦谛与灭谛二者,以无记之义,由一谛所含摄,也就是说,成为一个所谓“无记谛”。一个无记谛,由苦谛与灭谛二者所含摄。三谛由一谛所含摄:集谛、道谛、灭谛,由那具有不善、善、无记性质的苦谛一谛所含摄。一谛由三谛所含摄:一个苦谛,分别以不善、善、无记之义,由集谛、道谛、灭谛三者所含摄。不过,有些人这样解说:苦谛与集谛,是以不善之义由集谛所含摄;苦谛与道谛,是以善之义由道谛所含摄,而不是以能见之义;苦谛与灭谛,是以无记之义由灭谛所含摄,而不是以无为之义。
Catunnaṃsaccānaṃ kati kusalātiādīsu abyākatanti vipākābyākataṃ kiriyābyākataṃ rūpābyākataṃ nibbānābyākatanti catūsu abyākatesu nibbānābyākataṃ. Cattāripi hi kusalākusalalakkhaṇena na byākatattā abyākatāni. Siyā kusalanti kāmāvacararūpāvacarārūpāvacarakusalānaṃ vasena kusalampi bhaveyya. Siyā akusalanti taṇhaṃ ṭhapetvā sesākusalavasena. Siyā abyākatanti kāmāvacararūpāvacarārūpāvacaravipākakiriyānaṃ rūpānañca vasena. Siyā tīṇi saccānītiādīsu saṅgahitānīti gaṇitāni. Vatthuvasenāti akusalakusalābyākatadukkhasamudayanirodhamaggasaṅkhātavatthuvasena. Yaṃ dukkhasaccaṃ akusalanti ṭhapetvā taṇhaṃ avasesaṃ akusalaṃ. Akusalaṭṭhena dve saccāni ekasaccena saṅgahitānīti imāni dve dukkhasamudayasaccāni akusalaṭṭhena ekasaccena saṅgahitāni, akusalasaccaṃ nāma hotīti attho. Ekasaccaṃ dvīhi saccehi saṅgahitanti ekaṃ akusalasaccaṃ dvīhi dukkhasamudayasaccehi saṅgahitaṃ. Yaṃ dukkhasaccaṃ kusalanti tebhūmakaṃ kusalaṃ. Imāni dve dukkhamaggasaccāni kusalaṭṭhena ekasaccena saṅgahitāni, kusalasaccaṃ nāma hoti. Ekaṃ kusalasaccaṃ dvīhi dukkhamaggasaccehi saṅgahitaṃ. Yaṃ dukkhasaccaṃ abyākatanti tebhūmakavipākakiriyā rūpañca. Imāni dve dukkhanirodhasaccāni abyākataṭṭhena ekasaccena saṅgahitāni, ekaṃ abyākatasaccaṃ nāma hoti. Ekaṃ abyākatasaccaṃ dvīhi dukkhanirodhasaccehi saṅgahitaṃ. Tīṇi saccāni ekasaccena saṅgahitānīti samudayamagganirodhasaccāni ekena akusalakusalābyākatabhūtena dukkhasaccena saṅgahitāni. Ekaṃ saccaṃ tīhi saccehi saṅgahitanti ekaṃ dukkhasaccaṃ visuṃ akusalakusalaabyākatabhūtehi samudayamagganirodhasaccehi saṅgahitaṃ. Keci pana ‘‘dukkhasamudayasaccāni akusalaṭṭhena samudayasaccena saṅgahitāni, dukkhamaggasaccāni kusalaṭṭhena maggasaccena saṅgahitāni, na dassanaṭṭhena. Dukkhanirodhasaccāni abyākataṭṭhena nirodhasaccena saṅgahitāni, na asaṅkhataṭṭhenā’’ti vaṇṇayanti.
第二部经的经文解说
2. Dutiyasuttantapāḷivaṇṇanā
1313. 接着,为了依据另一部经的义理来说明对四谛的通达,他引用了“诸比丘,在我正觉之前……”等经文,并加以开示。其中,“诸比丘,在我正觉之前”:诸比丘,在我证得正觉、也就是一切知智之前。“尚未完全觉悟时”:在我还没有通达一切法的时候。“还是菩萨的时候”:正处在菩萨的阶段。“我生起了这样的念头”:坐在菩提座上时,生起了这样的思惟。“味”:因为能让人品味、贪著,所以叫味。“过患”:就是过失、祸患。“出离”:就是离开、脱离。“乐”:能带来舒适感受的,就叫乐;它让生起乐受的人变得快乐,就是这个意思。“喜悦”:因为与喜和悦相应,心变得善美,所以叫“意美”;意美的状态就是“喜悦”,这是在与喜相应的情况下,特别指出乐受本身。“无常”:就是不持久、不恒常。“苦”:因为是苦的所依,又属于行苦,所以叫苦。“变易法”:不能自主而住,会随着衰老和坏灭而改变本性。通过这个词,也说明了无我的状态。“调伏欲贪”:就是调伏、制伏被称为“欲”的贪爱,不是指调伏对色相的贪爱。“舍断欲贪”:就是对那欲贪的舍弃与断除。
13. Puna aññassa suttantassa atthavasena saccappaṭivedhaṃ niddisitukāmo pubbe me, bhikkhavetiādikaṃ suttantaṃ āharitvā dassesi. Tattha pubbe me, bhikkhave, sambodhāti bhikkhave, mama sambodhito sabbaññutaññāṇato pubbe. Anabhisambuddhassāti sabbadhamme appaṭividdhassa. Bodhisattasseva satoti bodhisattabhūtasseva. Etadahosīti bodhipallaṅke nisinnassa etaṃ parivitakkitaṃ ahosi. Assādoti assādīyatīti assādo. Ādīnavoti doso . Nissaraṇanti apagamanaṃ. Sukhanti sukhayatīti sukhaṃ, yassuppajjati, taṃ sukhitaṃ karotīti attho. Somanassanti pītisomanassayogato sobhanaṃ mano assāti sumano, sumanassa bhāvo somanassaṃ , sukhameva pītiyogato visesitaṃ. Aniccanti addhuvaṃ. Dukkhanti dukkhavatthuttā saṅkhāradukkhattā ca dukkhaṃ. Vipariṇāmadhammanti avasī hutvā jarābhaṅgavasena parivattanapakatikaṃ. Etena anattabhāvo vutto hoti. Chandarāgavinayoti chandasaṅkhātassa rāgassa saṃvaraṇaṃ, na vaṇṇarāgassa. Chandarāgappahānanti tasseva chandarāgassa pajahanaṃ.
“只要我还未能……”等句,应当这样前后连贯地理解:只要我对于这五种取蕴……还没有如实了知,还没有以更殊胜的智慧通达,那么我就没有宣称自己已经证得无上正等正觉、成就无上的一切知、是阿罗汉。“只要”只是虚词。“当……时”表示那时,或者那个时刻。“然后”表示紧接着之后。“而我心中生起了智与见”:由于完成见的作用,我心中生起了称为见的审察智。“不动摇”:无法被扰乱、无法被撼动。“解脱”:阿罗汉果的解脱。“这是最后一生”:这是最后的五蕴相续运转。“如今不再有后有”:从此不再有新的生起。以此说明了已断烦恼的审察。阿罗汉确实没有对剩余烦恼的审察。
Yāvakīvañcātiādīsu yāva imesaṃ pañcannaṃ upādānakkhandhānaṃ…pe… yathābhūtaṃ nābbhaññāsiṃ na adhikena ñāṇena paṭivijjhiṃ, tāva anuttaraṃ sammāsambodhiṃ anuttaraṃ sabbaññubhāvaṃ abhisambuddho abhisametāvī arahanti nevāhaṃ paccaññāsiṃ neva paṭiññaṃ akāsinti sambandhato attho. Kīvañcāti nipātamattaṃ. Yatoti yasmā, yadā vā. Athāti anantaraṃ. Ñāṇañca pana me dassanaṃ udapādīti dassanakiccakaraṇena dassanasaṅkhātaṃ paccavekkhaṇañāṇañca me uppajji. Akuppāti kopetuṃ cāletuṃ asakkuṇeyyā. Vimuttīti arahattaphalavimutti. Etāya eva phalapaccavekkhaṇāya magganibbānapaccavekkhaṇāpi vuttāva honti. Ayamantimā jātīti ayaṃ pacchimā khandhappavatti. Natthidāni punabbhavoti idāni puna uppatti natthi. Etena pahīnakilesapaccavekkhaṇā vuttā. Arahato hi avasiṭṭhakilesapaccavekkhaṇā na hoti.
第二部经的详细解说
3. Dutiyasuttantaniddesavaṇṇanā
1414. 在证知谛之智的次第安排中,关于“这是色的味”而说的“以断除来证知”:在前行阶段,先了知“这是与渴爱相应的色的味”,到了道的刹那,便生起称为“断除集”的集谛证知。所谓“集谛”,就是集谛证知智。因为,即使是以圣谛为所缘的智,也如在“凡是善法,全都归入四圣谛”等文句中所说那样,被称为“谛”。关于“这是色的过患”而说的“以遍知来证知”:在前行阶段,先了知“这是色的过患”,到了道的刹那,便生起称为“遍知苦”的苦谛证知。所谓“苦谛”,就是苦谛证知智。关于“这是色的出离”而说的“以作证来证知”:在前行阶段,先了知“这是色的出离”,到了道的刹那,便生起称为“作证灭”的灭谛证知。所谓“灭谛”,就是以灭谛为所缘的灭谛证知智。所谓“在这三处中”,是指在如前所说的集、苦、灭这三处中,依证知之力而转起的那些正见和正思惟。所谓“以修习来证知”,就是称为“修道”的道谛证知。所谓“道谛”,就是道谛证知智。
14. Saccappaṭivedhañāṇayojanakkame ca ayaṃ rūpassa assādoti pahānappaṭivedhoti pubbabhāge ‘‘ayaṃ taṇhāsampayutto rūpassa assādo’’ti ñatvā maggakkhaṇe samudayappahānasaṅkhāto samudayasaccappaṭivedho. Samudayasaccanti samudayasaccappaṭivedhañāṇaṃ. Ariyasaccārammaṇañāṇampi hi ‘‘ye keci kusalā dhammā, sabbe te catūsu ariyasaccesu saṅgahaṃ gacchantī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.300) viya ‘‘sacca’’nti vuccati. Ayaṃ rūpassa ādīnavoti pariññāpaṭivedhoti pubbabhāge ‘‘ayaṃ rūpassa ādīnavo’’ti ñatvā maggakkhaṇe dukkhapariññāsaṅkhāto dukkhasaccappaṭivedho. Dukkhasaccanti dukkhasaccappaṭivedhañāṇaṃ. Idaṃ rūpassa nissaraṇanti sacchikiriyāpaṭivedhoti pubbabhāge ‘‘idaṃ rūpassa nissaraṇa’’nti ñatvā maggakkhaṇe nirodhasacchikiriyāsaṅkhāto nirodhasaccappaṭivedho. Nirodhasaccanti nirodhasaccārammaṇaṃ nirodhasaccappaṭivedhañāṇaṃ . Yā imesu tīsu ṭhānesūti imesu yathāvuttesu tīsu samudayadukkhanirodhesu paṭivedhavasena pavattā yā diṭṭhi yo saṅkappoti yojanā. Bhāvanāpaṭivedhoti ayaṃ maggabhāvanāsaṅkhāto maggasaccappaṭivedho. Maggasaccanti maggasaccappaṭivedhañāṇaṃ.
1515. 接着,又以另一种方式来说明诸谛以及证知诸谛,于是说出“谛,以几种行相为谛”等话。其中,因为一切全知菩萨在菩提座上坐着时,都会去寻求老死等苦谛的因,也就是生等集谛,心里想:“这到底是什么?”就在这样寻求的时候,他们确定“这是缘”,从而把握老死等苦谛的因,也就是生等集谛。因此,那种寻求和那种把握,因为是对诸谛的寻求和把握,所以被称为“谛”,也就是说,从寻求的意义和把握的意义上称为谛。这种把握缘的方法,独觉佛也能得到;而声闻则是通过传闻来把握缘。所谓“从通达的意义上”,是指在前行阶段这样被寻求、被把握的诸谛,在道的那一刹那,以同一通达的意义而说。
15. Puna aparena pariyāyena saccāni ca saccappaṭivedhañca dassento saccanti katihākārehi saccantiādimāha. Tattha yasmā sabbepi sabbaññubodhisattā bodhipallaṅke nisinnā jarāmaraṇādikassa dukkhasaccassa jātiādikaṃ samudayasaccaṃ ‘‘kiṃ nu kho’’ti esanti, tathā esantā ca jarāmaraṇādikassa dukkhasaccassa jātiādikaṃ samudayasaccaṃ ‘‘paccayo’’ti vavatthapento pariggaṇhanti, tasmā sā ca esanā so ca pariggaho saccānaṃ esanattā pariggahattā ca ‘‘sacca’’nti katvā esanaṭṭhena pariggahaṭṭhenāti vuttaṃ. Ayañca vidhi paccekabuddhānampi paccayapariggahe labbhatiyeva, sāvakānaṃ pana anussavavasena paccayapariggahe labbhati. Paṭivedhaṭṭhenāti pubbabhāge tathā esitānaṃ pariggahitānañca maggakkhaṇe ekapaṭivedhaṭṭhena.
在“以什么为因”这类说法里,“因”等所有词都是原因的同义词。因为原因把结果隐藏起来,就像催促说“来,抓住它”一样,促使结果出现,所以叫“因”。因为结果从它那里一起生起、出生、显现,所以叫“集”、“生”、“显现”。这里的意思是:“这是什么的原因”就是“以什么为因”;“这是什么集起”就是“以什么为集”;“这是什么出生”就是“以什么为生”;“这是什么显现”就是“以什么为显现”。不过,按照前面说的意义,它的“生”也就是因、集、生、显现,所以经文说“以生为因”等等。“老死”指苦谛。“老死集”指它的缘,也就是集谛。“老死灭”指灭谛。“导向老死灭之道”指道谛。按照这个方法,应当理解所有语句中的意义。
Kiṃnidānantiādīsu nidānādīni sabbāni kāraṇavevacanāni. Kāraṇañhi yasmā phalaṃ nideti ‘‘handa naṃ gaṇhathā’’ti appeti viya, tasmā ‘‘nidāna’’nti vuccati. Yasmā phalaṃ tato samudeti, jāyati, pabhavati; tasmā samudayo, jāti, pabhavoti vuccati. Ayaṃ panettha attho – kiṃ nidānaṃ etassāti kiṃnidānaṃ. Ko samudayo etassāti kiṃsamudayaṃ. Kā jāti etassāti kiṃjātikaṃ. Ko pabhavo etassāti kiṃpabhavaṃ. Yasmā pana tassa jāti yathāvuttena atthena nidānañceva samudayo ca jāti ca pabhavo ca, tasmā jātinidānantiādimāha. Jarāmaraṇanti dukkhasaccaṃ. Jarāmaraṇasamudayanti tassa paccayaṃ samudayasaccaṃ. Jarāmaraṇanirodhanti nirodhasaccaṃ. Jarāmaraṇanirodhagāminiṃ paṭipadanti maggasaccaṃ. Imināva nayena sabbapadesu attho veditabbo.
1616. “了知灭”:指以灭为所缘而生的了知。生,有时是苦谛,有时是集谛——从“由有缘而得以显现”这个意义上说,它是苦谛;从“作为老死的缘”这个意义上说,它是集谛。其余各支也应依此理解。至于“无明有时是苦谛”,则是说:从漏的生起,就是无明的生起这个意义上讲的。
16.Nirodhappajānanāti ārammaṇakaraṇena nirodhassa pajānanā. Jāti siyā dukkhasaccaṃ, siyā samudayasaccanti bhavapaccayā paññāyanaṭṭhena dukkhasaccaṃ , jarāmaraṇassa paccayaṭṭhena samudayasaccaṃ. Esa nayo sesesupi. Avijjā siyā dukkhasaccanti pana āsavasamudayā avijjāsamudayaṭṭhenāti.
觉支论注释
Bojjhaṅgakathāvaṇṇanā
1717. 现在,为了显示由证知四圣谛而成就的觉支殊胜,对前面以经典为引导所说的觉支论作补充解释,说明其中未曾说过的含义。在这里,先就经典来说:觉支,就是觉悟的支分,或者觉悟者的支分。这话说的是什么呢?当出世间道生起的那一刹那,有一组法共同现起,它能对治昏沉、掉举、偏于止、偏于策励、贪著欲乐、执著苦行、执取断见、执取常见等种种过患,这组法就是念、择法、精进、喜、轻安、定、舍。圣弟子依靠这组法而觉悟,所以它被称为觉悟;所谓觉悟,就是从烦恼随眠中醒来,或者通达四圣谛,或者亲证涅槃。正如经中所说:修习七觉支后,证得无上正等觉。这组法就是那被称为觉悟的法的支分,所以叫觉支,就像禅支、道支那样。再者,这位圣弟子因为依靠前面所说的这组法而觉悟,所以被称为觉悟者;这位觉悟者的支分,也叫觉支,就像军队的支分、战车的支分那样。因此注疏师们说:能觉悟者的支分,所以叫觉支。念觉支等的含义,已经在应了知的解释部分说过了。
17. Idāni saccappaṭivedhasiddhaṃ bojjhaṅgavisesaṃ dassentena kathitāya suttantapubbaṅgamāya bojjhaṅgakathāya apubbatthānuvaṇṇanā. Tattha suttante tāva bojjhaṅgāti bodhiyā, bodhissa vā aṅgāti bojjhaṅgā. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti (saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 3.5.182) – yā hi ayaṃ dhammasāmaggī, yāya lokuttaramaggakkhaṇe uppajjamānāya līnuddhaccapatiṭṭhānāyūhanakāmasukhattakilamathānuyogaucchedasassatābhinivesādīnaṃ anekesaṃ upaddavānaṃ paṭipakkhabhūtāya satidhammavicayavīriyapītipassaddhisamādhiupekkhāsaṅkhātāya dhammasāmaggiyā ariyasāvako bujjhatīti katvā bodhīti vuccati, bujjhatīti kilesasantānaniddāya vuṭṭhahati, cattāri vā ariyasaccāni paṭivijjhati, nibbānameva vā sacchikarotīti vuttaṃ hoti. Yathāha – ‘‘satta bojjhaṅge bhāvetvā anuttaraṃ sammāsambodhiṃ abhisambuddho’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.378; dī. ni. 3.143). Tassā dhammasāmaggīsaṅkhātāya bodhiyā aṅgāti bojjhaṅgā jhānaṅgamaggaṅgādayo viya. Yopesa yathāvuttappakārāya etāya dhammasāmaggiyā bujjhatīti katvā ariyasāvako bodhīti vuccati, tassa bodhissa aṅgātipi bojjhaṅgā senaṅgarathaṅgādayo viya. Tenāhu aṭṭhakathācariyā ‘‘bujjhanakassa puggalassa aṅgāti bojjhaṅgā’’ti. Satisambojjhaṅgādīnaṃ attho abhiññeyyaniddese vutto.
在解释“觉支”的含义时,“导向觉悟”意思是导向觉醒。导向谁的觉醒呢?是导向通过道与果观照涅槃、已做完应做之事者的觉醒;或者说,是通过道从烦恼的沉睡中醒来,通过果而处于已觉醒的状态。这就是这里要表达的意思。即使是以强力的观,觉支也导向觉悟。因此,这是观、道、果三种觉支共同的含义。因为在这三种情况下,它们都导向觉悟,导向涅槃的证悟。由此说“觉悟的支分,就是觉支”。以“它们觉悟”等五组四句所说的觉支生起之处,已在“应了知”的解释中讲过了。此外,说“它们觉悟”,是为了显示觉支有能力完成自己的作用,所以用主动者的表述。说“以觉悟之义”,是为了显示虽然有能力完成自己的作用,但并没有一个实际的作者,所以用状态的表述。说“它们使觉悟”,是因为修习觉支能推动那些觉悟的修行者,所以用使役因作者的表述来说明觉支。说“以使觉悟之义”,则和前面一样,用使役因作者来说明状态。通过这些方式,表达“觉支是觉悟的支分”。说“以菩提分法的意义”,是因为这些觉支存在于那位以觉悟之义而得名为“菩提”的修行者这一边。这是说明这些觉支对那位修行者有助益。通过这些,表达“它们是觉者的支分,所以叫觉支”。在“获得慧”等六组中,“以获得慧之义”,是指修行者通过慧而达到的意思。“种植之义”,是指使众生建立起来的意思。“令到达之义”,是指使已建立者完成的意思。这些观觉支,被“pati-abhi-saṃ”三个前缀所限定,被称为道觉支和果觉支。应当知道,所有以法的名称所描述的觉支,都是“觉悟的支分,所以叫觉支”。
Bojjhaṅgatthaniddese bodhāya saṃvattantīti bujjhanatthāya saṃvattanti. Kassa bujjhanatthāya? Maggaphalehi nibbānassa paccavekkhaṇāya katakiccassa bujjhanatthāya, maggena vā kilesaniddāto pabujjhanatthāya phalena pabuddhabhāvatthāyāpīti vuttaṃ hoti. Balavavipassanāyapi bojjhaṅgā bodhāya saṃvattanti . Tasmā ayaṃ vipassanāmaggaphalabojjhaṅgānaṃ sādhāraṇattho. Tīsupi hi ṭhānesu bodhāya nibbānapaṭivedhāya saṃvattanti. Etena bodhiyā aṅgāti bojjhaṅgāti vuttaṃ hoti. Bujjhantīti bojjhaṅgātiādīhi pañcahi catukkehi vuttānaṃ bojjhaṅgānaṃ uppattiṭṭhānaṃ abhiññeyyaniddese vuttaṃ. Api ca bujjhantīti bojjhaṅgānaṃ sakiccakaraṇe samatthabhāvadassanatthaṃ kattuniddeso . Bujjhanaṭṭhenāti sakiccakaraṇasamatthattepi sati kattuno abhāvadassanatthaṃ bhāvaniddeso. Bodhentīti bojjhaṅgabhāvanāya bujjhantānaṃ yogīnaṃ payojakattā bojjhaṅgānaṃ hetukattuniddeso. Bodhanaṭṭhenāti paṭhamaṃ vuttanayeneva payojakahetukattunā bhāvaniddeso. Etehi bodhiyā aṅgā bojjhaṅgāti vuttaṃ hoti. Bodhipakkhiyaṭṭhenāti bujjhanaṭṭhena bodhīti laddhanāmassa yogissa pakkhe bhavattā. Ayametesaṃ yogino upakārakattaniddeso. Etehi bodhissa aṅgāti bojjhaṅgāti vuttaṃ hoti. Buddhilabhanaṭṭhenātiādike chakke buddhilabhanaṭṭhenāti yogāvacarena buddhiyā pāpuṇanaṭṭhena. Ropanaṭṭhenāti sattānaṃ patiṭṭhāpanaṭṭhena . Pāpanaṭṭhenāti patiṭṭhāpitāya niṭṭhāpanaṭṭhena. Ime vipassanābojjhaṅgā pati-abhi-saṃ-iti tīhi upasaggehi visesitā maggaphalabojjhaṅgāti vadanti. Sabbesampi dhammavohārena niddiṭṭhānaṃ bojjhaṅgānaṃ bodhiyā aṅgāti bojjhaṅgāti vuttaṃ hotīti veditabbaṃ.
根根等十法的解释
Mūlamūlakādidasakavaṇṇanā
1818. 在讲“以根义”等内容的根根十法里,“以根义”是指:在观等修行中,前面的每一个觉支,对于后面的每一个觉支、对于同时生起的诸法,以及彼此之间,都具有“根”的意义。“以根行义”是指:先成为根,然后以根的身份运作,这就是根行;因此,“以根行义”就是作为根而运作的意思。“以根摄义”是指:这些觉支从一开始生起时,就是为了生起而被摄持,所以叫摄持;它们本身就是根,这种摄持就是根的摄持,所以叫根摄持;这就是“以根摄持义”。这些觉支彼此之间以眷属的方式围绕转起,所以有“眷属义”;以修习达到圆满,所以有“圆满义”;以到达究竟,所以有“成熟义”。这些觉支本身就是根,又因为分成六种而具有无碍解,所以叫根无碍解;这就是“以根无碍解义”。“以令到达根无碍解义”是指:对于专心修习觉支的瑜伽行者来说,能使他到达那种根无碍解。对于那位瑜伽行者来说,还有对那种根无碍解获得自在的“自在状态”之义。在其他类似以人为对象的说法中,应当知道,说的就是“觉支是觉者的支分”,所以叫觉支。在“于根无碍解得自在者”这类表述中,也应当知道,这是在说果觉支。
18.Mūlaṭṭhenātiādike mūlamūlake dasake mūlaṭṭhenāti vipassanādīsu purimā purimā bojjhaṅgā pacchimānaṃ pacchimānaṃ bojjhaṅgānañca sahajātadhammānañca aññamaññañca mūlaṭṭhena. Mūlacariyaṭṭhenāti mūlaṃ hutvā cariyā pavatti mūlacariyā. Tena mūlacariyaṭṭhena, mūlaṃ hutvā pavattanaṭṭhenāti attho. Mūlapariggahaṭṭhenāti te eva bojjhaṅgā ādito pabhuti uppādanatthāya parigayhamānattā pariggahā, mūlāniyeva pariggahā mūlapariggahā. Tena mūlapariggahaṭṭhena. Te eva aññamaññaṃ parivāravasena parivāraṭṭhena. Bhāvanāpāripūrivasena paripūraṇaṭṭhena. Niṭṭhaṃ pāpuṇanavasena paripākaṭṭhena. Te eva mūlāni ca chabbidhā pabhedabhinnattā paṭisambhidā cāti mūlapaṭisambhidā. Tena mūlapaṭisambhidaṭṭhena. Mūlapaṭisambhidāpāpanaṭṭhenāti bojjhaṅgabhāvanānuyuttassa yogino taṃ mūlapaṭisambhidaṃ pāpanaṭṭhena . Tasseva yogino tassā mūlapaṭisambhidāya vasībhāvaṭṭhena. Sesesupi īdisesu puggalavohāresu bodhissa aṅgāti bojjhaṅgāti vuttaṃ hotīti veditabbaṃ. Mūlapaṭisambhidāya vasībhāvappattānampīti īdisesupi niṭṭhāvacanesu phalabojjhaṅgāti veditabbaṃ. Vasībhāvaṃ pattānantipi pāṭho.
在其余九组以因等为开头的十法中,共通表述的含义也应依照同样的方法来理解。但在不共通的部分,前面所说的那些觉支,因为是前面所说诸法的生起之因,所以叫因;因为能资助、支持它们,所以叫缘。这些觉支本身,由于具有彼分断、正断、止息、清净的性质,所以叫清净;由于远离过失,所以叫无过失。依据一切善法都是出离这一说法,所以叫出离;由于从烦恼中解脱,以彼分解脱等方式,所以叫解脱。道觉支和果觉支,因为远离了作为其所缘的诸漏,所以是无漏。三种觉支都因为从烦恼中空无,以彼分远离等方式,所以是远离。观觉支和道觉支,由于完全舍离而遣舍,以及跃入而遣舍,所以是遣舍;果觉支由于跃入而遣舍,所以是遣舍。
Sesesupi hetumūlakādīsu navasu dasakesu imināva nayena sādhāraṇavacanānaṃ attho veditabbo . Asādhāraṇesu pana yathāvuttā eva bojjhaṅgā yathāvuttānaṃ dhammānaṃ janakattā hetū nāma honti. Upatthambhakattā paccayā nāma. Te eva tadaṅgasamucchedapaṭippassaddhivisuddhibhūtattā visuddhi nāma. Vajjavirahitattā anavajjā nāma. ‘‘Sabbepi kusalā dhammā nekkhamma’’nti vacanato nekkhammaṃ nāma. Kilesehi vimuttattā tadaṅgavimuttiādivasena vimutti nāma. Maggaphalabojjhaṅgā visayībhūtehi āsavehi virahitattā anāsavā. Tividhāpi bojjhaṅgā kilesehi suññattā tadaṅgavivekādivasena vivekā. Vipassanāmaggabojjhaṅgā pariccāgavosaggattā pakkhandanavosaggattā ca vosaggā. Phalabojjhaṅgā pakkhandanavosaggattā vosaggā.
19以“觉知根义”等为首的九种十法,是逐词分别说明的,应当依照前面所说的方式来了知。“得自在者”这个词,因为不是现在时的表述,所以没有在这里套用。“摄受义”等,则已经在“应了知”的解说部分中解释过了。
19.Mūlaṭṭhaṃbujjhantītiādayo ekekapadavasena niddiṭṭhā nava dasakā vuttanayeneva veditabbā. Vasībhāvappattānanti padaṃ pana vattamānavacanābhāvena na yojitaṃ. Pariggahaṭṭhādayo abhiññeyyaniddese vuttatthā.
2020. 接着,长老为了讲解觉支的修行方法,先诵出自己所说的经,然后按照注释的方式,说出“一时”等序言部分的因缘,再诵出经文。正因为这部经是他自己说的,所以这里没有说“如是我闻”。而这里说“具寿舍利弗”,是为了表明说法者的身份,把自己当作别人一样来称呼。这种说法方式,在世间典籍中也常被使用。“午前时分”,指整个午前时段。这里用业格来表示完全涵盖整个时段的意思。其余两个时段——午后和夜晚——也是同样的。“住”指的是在缘取涅槃为所缘时,持续安住于其中;“退”指的是从涅槃所缘退失、远离。
20. Puna thero attanā desitaṃ suttantaṃ uddisitvā tassa niddesavasena bojjhaṅgavidhiṃ dassetukāmo ekaṃ samayantiādikaṃ nidānaṃ vatvā suttantaṃ tāva uddisi. Attanā desitasuttattā eva cettha evaṃ me sutanti na vuttaṃ. Āyasmā sāriputtoti panettha desakabyattibhāvatthaṃ attānaṃ paraṃ viya katvā vuttaṃ. Īdisañhi vacanaṃ loke ganthesu payujjanti. Pubbaṇhasamayanti sakalaṃ pubbaṇhasamayaṃ. Accantasaṃyogatthe upayogavacanaṃ. Sesadvayepi eseva nayo. Satisambojjhaṅgo iti ceme hotīti satisambojjhaṅgoti evañce mayhaṃ hoti. Appamāṇoti me hotīti appamāṇoti evaṃ me hoti. Susamāraddhoti me hotīti suṭṭhu paripuṇṇoti evaṃ me hoti. Tiṭṭhantanti nibbānārammaṇe pavattivasena tiṭṭhantaṃ. Cavatīti nibbānārammaṇato apagacchati. Sesabojjhaṅgesupi eseva nayo.
“国王的大臣”是指国王的重要大臣,或者是指拥有大量财富、以财富的多少来衡量的人。“种种染色之物”是指各种颜色所染的物品,这里用属格来表示“充满”的意思,也就是指种种染色之物。“Dussakaraṇḍaka”意思是衣箱。“Dussayuga”意思是成对的衣服。“Pārupituṃ”意思是穿上。在这部经里,长老讲的是果觉支。当长老以念觉支为首进入果等至时,其余的觉支就跟着它生起;当以择法觉支等其中任何一个为首进入时,其余的觉支也同样跟着它生起。长老就是为了这样显示自己在果等至中已经修得熟练自在,才讲了这部经。
Rājamahāmattassāti rañño mahāamaccassa, mahatiyā vā bhogamattāya bhogappamāṇena samannāgatassa. Nānārattānanti nānāraṅgarattānaṃ, pūraṇatthe sāmivacanaṃ, nānārattehīti attho. Dussakaraṇḍakoti dussapeḷā. Dussayuganti vatthayugalaṃ. Pārupitunti acchādetuṃ. Imasmiṃ suttante therassa phalabojjhaṅgā kathitā. Yadā hi thero satisambojjhaṅgaṃ sīsaṃ katvā phalasamāpattiṃ samāpajjati, tadā itare tadanvayā honti. Yadā dhammavicayādīsu aññataraṃ, tadā sesāpi tadanvayā hontīti evaṃ phalasamāpattiyā attano ciṇṇavasībhāvaṃ dassento thero imaṃ suttantaṃ kathesīti.
《经义释》的注释
Suttantaniddesavaṇṇanā
21“念觉支怎么会是这样呢?”意思是:以念觉支为首进入果等至时,即使其他觉支也存在,这样生起的念觉支是怎样的?也就是说,对于生起这个念觉支的人,那个念觉支究竟是什么?“灭出现的时间”:指灭出现的那段时间,也就是涅槃作为所缘而出现的那段时间。“火焰的程度”:指光焰的量。“怎么会是无量呢?”意思是:即使在无量的念觉支也存在的情况下,这样成为无量的念觉支是怎样的?也就是说,对于生起这个念觉支的人,那个无量的念觉支是什么?“有量所缚”:烦恼、缠缚以及带来再有的诸行,就叫作“有量所缚”。依据“贪能作衡量,嗔能作衡量,痴能作衡量”的说法,当某人生起贪等时,以“这有这么多”的方式去衡量,所以称为“量”。被系缚、被挂碍、依赖于这个量,因此烦恼等就叫作“有量所缚”。其中,“烦恼”指随眠状态的烦恼,“缠缚”指已经现起的烦恼。“带来再有的行”:一再制造存有的,就是“再有”;以这种再有为性情的,就是“带来再有的”;也就是善与不善的业行。“无量”:因为没有上述那种量,所以是无量。道与果也是无量的,为了显示它们的殊胜,所以以不动之义和无所造作之义来说。因为坏灭不存在,所以是不动;因为诸缘不存在,所以是无所造作。凡是既不动又无所造作的,就极其远离一切量。
21.Kathaṃsatisambojjhaṅgo iti ce hotīti bojjhaṅgoti satisambojjhaṅgaṃ sīsaṃ katvā phalasamāpattiṃ samāpajjantassa aññesu bojjhaṅgesu vijjamānesu evaṃ ayaṃ satisambojjhaṅgo hotīti iti ce pavattassa kathaṃ so satisambojjhaṅgo hotīti attho. Yāvatā nirodhūpaṭṭhātīti yattakena kālena nirodho upaṭṭhāti, yattake kāle ārammaṇato nibbānaṃ upaṭṭhātīti attho. Yāvatā accīti yattakena parimāṇena jālā. Kathaṃ appamāṇo iti ce hotīti bojjhaṅgoti na appamāṇepi satisambojjhaṅge vijjamāne evaṃ ayaṃ appamāṇo hotīti iti ce pavattassa so appamāṇo satisambojjhaṅgo kathaṃ hotīti attho. Pamāṇabaddhāti kilesā ca pariyuṭṭhānā ca ponobhavikasaṅkhārā ca pamāṇabaddhā nāma honti. ‘‘Rāgopamāṇakaraṇo, doso pamāṇakaraṇo, moho pamāṇakaraṇo’’ti (ma. ni. 1.459) vacanato rāgādayo yassa uppajjanti, ‘‘ayaṃ ettako’’ti tassa pamāṇakaraṇato pamāṇaṃ nāma. Tasmiṃ pamāṇe baddhā paṭibaddhā āyattāti kilesādayo pamāṇabaddhā nāma honti. Kilesāti anusayabhūtā, pariyuṭṭhānāti samudācārappattakilesā. Saṅkhārā ponobhavikāti punappunaṃ bhavakaraṇaṃ punabhavo, punabhavo sīlametesanti ponabhavikā, ponabhavikā eva ponobhavikā. Kusalākusalakammasaṅkhātā saṅkhārā. Appamāṇoti vuttappakārassa pamāṇassa abhāvena appamāṇo. Maggaphalānampi appamāṇattā tato visesanatthaṃ acalaṭṭhena asaṅkhataṭṭhenāti vuttaṃ. Bhaṅgābhāvato acalo, paccayābhāvato asaṅkhato. Yo hi acalo asaṅkhato ca, so ativiya pamāṇavirahito hoti.
“如何是善修习?”这个问题,应当按紧接着前面所说的方式来理解。所谓“不平”,是因为它本身就不平,又是造成不平状态的原因,所以叫不平。所谓“平正之法”,是以寂静之义和殊胜之义而成为平正之法。因为没有任何限量,所以是寂静。经中说:“诸比丘,凡是有为法或无为法,离欲在这一切法中被说为最上。”因为它在一切法中最胜,所以是殊胜。在那平正之法中精勤修习,就是善修习。“因转向故”这句话,是针对果等至生起的时候说的。意思是说,意门转向心在那称为不生的涅槃上生起了。“住立”就是生起、运行的意思。“生起”等的含义,前面已经解释过了。以其余各觉支为根本的那些段落,也应当按同样的方式来理解。
Kathaṃ susamāraddho iti ce hotīti bojjhaṅgoti anantaraṃ vuttanayena yojetabbaṃ. Visamāti sayañca visamattā, visamassa ca bhāvassa hetuttā visamā. Samadhammoti santaṭṭhena paṇītaṭṭhena samo dhammo. Pamāṇābhāvato santo. ‘‘Yāvatā, bhikkhave, dhammā saṅkhatā vā asaṅkhatā vā, virāgo tesaṃ dhammānaṃ aggamakkhāyatī’’ti (a. ni. 4.34; itivu. 90) vacanato sabbadhammuttamaṭṭhena paṇīto. Tasmiṃ samadhammoti vutte susame āraddho susamāraddho. Āvajjitattāti phalasamāpattiyā pavattakālaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Anuppādādisaṅkhāte nibbāne manodvārāvajjanassa uppannattāti vuttaṃ hoti. Tiṭṭhatīti pavattati. Uppādādīni heṭṭhā vuttatthāni. Sesabojjhaṅgamūlakesupi vāresu eseva nayo.
2222. 现在,在说完觉支的讨论之后,接着按照觉支讨论的脉络,来说以经典为优先的慈心讨论中尚未出现过的义理注释。其中,在经典里,“已亲近”是指以恭敬心亲近。“已修习”是指已令增长。“已多作”是指一再地去做。“已如车乘所作”是指做得像与配备好的车乘一样。“已作基础”是指以依止之义而像基础一样去做。“已现起”是指已现前。“已遍积”是指从四周积累、堆积起来。“已善发起”是指很好地发起、好好地去做。“利益”是指功德。“可预期”是指可以期待、可以希求。“安乐而睡”是指不像其他人那样翻来覆去、打呼噜地苦睡,而是不那样睡,安乐地睡。即使入睡了,也像入了等至一样。“安乐而醒”是指不像别人那样呻吟、伸懒腰、翻来覆去地苦醒,而是不那样醒,像绽放的莲花一样,安乐地、毫无变异地醒来。“不见恶梦”是指即使做梦,也只做吉祥的梦。就像在礼敬塔庙、作供养、听法一样。而别人会梦见自己被盗贼包围、被猛兽袭击、从悬崖坠落,他不会这样梦见恶梦。“为人们所喜爱”是指像挂在胸前的珠饰、戴在头上的花鬘一样,为人们所喜爱、所悦意。“为非人所喜爱”是指正如为人们所喜爱一样,也为非人所喜爱。“诸天守护”是指诸天像父母守护儿子一样守护他。“火、毒、刀不能侵”是指住于慈心者的身体,火、毒、刀不能侵入、不能进入,也就是说不能损害他的身体。“心迅速得定”是指住于慈心者很快就能得定,他没有迟滞。“面色清净”是指他的面容清净,像脱离束缚的多罗果一样。“不昏昧而命终”是指住于慈心者没有所谓昏昧而死的事,他命终时像入睡一样,不昏昧。“若未能证得更上之法”是指若不能从慈等至更进一步证得阿罗汉果,那么死后,就像睡醒一样往生梵天界,意思是投生到梵天界。
22. Idāni bojjhaṅgakathānantaraṃ kathitāya bojjhaṅgakathāgatiyā suttantapubbaṅgamāya mettākathāya apubbatthānuvaṇṇanā. Tattha suttante tāva āsevitāyāti ādarena sevitāya. Bhāvitāyāti vaḍḍhitāya. Bahulīkatāyāti punappunaṃ katāya. Yānīkatāyāti yuttayānasadisāya katāya. Vatthukatāyāti patiṭṭhānaṭṭhena vatthu viya katāya. Anuṭṭhitāyāti paccupaṭṭhitāya. Paricitāyāti samantato citāya upacitāya. Susamāraddhāyāti suṭṭhu samāraddhāya sukatāya . Ānisaṃsāti guṇā. Pāṭikaṅkhāti paṭikaṅkhitabbā icchitabbā. Sukhaṃ supatīti yathā sesajanā samparivattamānā kākacchamānā dukkhaṃ supanti, evaṃ asupitvā sukhaṃ supati. Niddaṃ okkantopi samāpattiṃ samāpanno viya hoti. Sukhaṃ paṭibujjhatīti yathā aññe nitthunantā vijambhantā samparivattantā dukkhaṃ paṭibujjhanti, evaṃ apaṭibujjhitvā vikasamānamiva padumaṃ sukhaṃ nibbikāraṃ paṭibujjhati. Na pāpakaṃ supinaṃ passatīti supinaṃ passantopi bhaddakameva supinaṃ passati. Cetiyaṃ vandanto viya pūjaṃ karonto viya dhammaṃ suṇanto viya ca hoti. Yathā panaññe attānaṃ corehi parivāritaṃ viya vāḷehi upaddutaṃ viya papāte patantaṃ viya ca passanti, na evaṃ pāpakaṃ supinaṃ passati. Manussānaṃ piyo hotīti ure āmuttamuttāhāro viya sīse piḷandhamālā viya ca manussānaṃ piyo hoti manāpo. Amanussānaṃ piyo hotīti yatheva ca manussānaṃ, evaṃ amanussānampi piyo hoti. Devatā rakkhantīti puttamiva mātāpitaro devatā rakkhanti. Nāssa aggi vā visaṃ vā satthaṃ vā kamatīti mettāvihārissa kāye aggi vā visaṃ vā satthaṃ vā na kamati na pavisati, nāssa kāyaṃ vikopetīti vuttaṃ hoti. Tuvaṭaṃ cittaṃ samādhiyatīti mettāvihārino khippameva cittaṃ samādhiyati, natthi tassa dandhāyitattaṃ. Mukhavaṇṇo vippasīdatīti bandhanā pamuttatālapakkaṃ viya cassa vippasannavaṇṇaṃ mukhaṃ hoti. Asammūḷho kālaṃ karotīti mettāvihārino sammohamaraṇaṃ nāma natthi, asammūḷho niddaṃ okkamanto viya kālaṃ karoti. Uttari appaṭivijjhantoti mettāsamāpattito uttariṃ arahattaṃ adhigantuṃ asakkonto ito cavitvā suttappabuddho viya brahmalokūpago hotīti brahmalokaṃ upapajjatīti attho.
在慈心的说明中,“无方所遍满”是指没有界限;有界限就不是无方所。因此,“无方所”的意思就是没有界限,也就是说,毫无分隔地全面触达。“有方所”则是按特定范围来修。“方向遍满”是指在各个方向遍满。“一切”是指毫无剩余、完全涵盖。“有情”这个词的含义,在《智论》的论母注释中已经说过;不过按通俗用法,这个称呼也用在离贪者身上,就像竹篾做的扇子也叫“多罗叶扇”一样。“无怨”是指没有怨恨。“无嗔”是指没有嗔恨。“无恼”是指没有痛苦,也写作“无折磨”。“愿安乐而有身”是指愿他们快乐地维持生命。其中,“无怨”显示了在自身相续中依于他人、以及在他人相续中依于对方都没有怨恨;“无嗔”等则表明,因为没有怨恨,所以没有以怨恨为根源的嗔恨;“无恼”表明,因为没有嗔恨,所以没有以嗔恨为根源的痛苦;“愿安乐而有身”表明,因为没有痛苦,所以能安乐地维持生命。应当知道,这里文句之间的关联就是这样。而在这“无怨”“无嗔”“无恼”“愿安乐而有身”四句中,哪一句在心中最明显,就依那一句来遍满慈心。
Mettāniddese anodhiso pharaṇāti odhi mariyādā, na odhi anodhi. Tato anodhiso, anodhitoti attho, nippadesato phusanāti vuttaṃ hoti. Odhisoti padesavasena. Disāpharaṇāti disāsu pharaṇā. Sabbeti anavasesapariyādānaṃ. Sattātipadassa attho ñāṇakathāmātikāvaṇṇanāyaṃ vutto, ruḷhīsaddena pana vītarāgesupi ayaṃ vohāro vattati vilīvamayepi bījanivisese tālavaṇṭavohāro viya. Averāti verarahitā. Abyāpajjāti byāpādarahitā. Anīghāti niddukkhā. Anigghātipi pāṭho. Sukhī attānaṃpariharantūti sukhitā hutvā attabhāvaṃ vattayantu. ‘‘Averā’’ti ca sakasantāne ca pare paṭicca, parasantāne ca itare paṭicca verābhāvo dassito, ‘‘abyāpajjā’’tiādīsu verābhāvā tammūlakabyāpādābhāvo, ‘‘anīghā’’ti byāpādābhāvā tammūlakadukkhābhāvo, ‘‘sukhī attānaṃ pariharantū’’ti dukkhābhāvāsukhena attabhāvapariharaṇaṃ dassitanti evamettha vacanasambandho veditabboti. Imesu ca ‘‘averā hontū’’tiādīsu catūsupi vacanesu yaṃ yaṃ pākaṭaṃ hoti, tassa tassa vasena mettāya pharati.
在“命”等词中,因为能呼吸所以叫“命”,意思是依靠入息和出息而存活。因为已经生起所以叫“生”,意思是已经再生出来。“地狱”叫做puṃ,流向那个地狱的,所以叫“人”。“有身”指身体,或者就是五蕴;因为仅仅依它而施设存在,所以属于那个有身、被那个有身所限定、包含在那个有身之中的,就叫“有身所摄”。就像“众生”这个词一样,其余那些词也都是依照惯用语来安立的,应当知道这些都是“一切众生”的同义词。虽然还有别的如“一切生类、一切命者”等也是“一切众生”的同义词,但为了明显起见,只取这五个,而说“以五种方式无分别遍满的慈心解脱”。如果有人不把这些仅仅当作名言,还想在意义上也追求差别,那就和无分别遍满相矛盾了。所以,不应该那样执取意义,而应该在这五种方式中,随便哪一种,来作无分别的慈心遍满。
Pāṇātiādīsu pāṇanatāya pāṇā, assāsapassāsāyattavuttitāyāti attho. Bhūtattā bhūtā, abhinibbattāti attho. Puṃ vuccati nirayo, taṃ puṃ galanti gacchantīti puggalā. Attabhāvo vuccati sarīraṃ, khandhapañcakameva vā, taṃ upādāya paññattimattasabbhāvato, tasmiṃ attabhāve pariyāpannā paricchinnā antogadhāti attabhāvapariyāpannā. Yathā ca sattāti vacanaṃ, evaṃ sesānipi ruḷhīvasena āropetvā sabbānetāni sabbasattavevacanānīti veditabbāni. Kāmañca aññānipi ‘‘sabbe jantū sabbe jīvā’’tiādīni sabbasattavevacanāni atthi, pākaṭavasena pana imāneva pañca gahetvā ‘‘pañcahākārehi anodhiso pharaṇā mettācetovimuttī’’ti vuccati. Ye pana ‘‘sattā pāṇā’’tiādīnaṃ na kevalaṃ vacanamattatova, atha kho atthatopi nānattameva iccheyyuṃ, tesaṃ anodhiso pharaṇā virujjhati. Tasmā tathā atthaṃ aggahetvā imesu pañcasu ākāresu aññataravasena anodhiso mettāya pharati.
在限定对象的遍满中,说“女人、男人”是按性别来说的;说“圣者、凡夫”是按圣者和凡夫来说的;说“天、人、堕恶趣者”是按投生的方式来说的。在方向遍满中,如果不作方向的区分,对一切方向以“一切众生”等方式来遍满,就是无限定对象的遍满;如果对一切方向以“一切女人”等方式来遍满,就是有限定对象的遍满。
Odhiso pharaṇe pana itthiyo purisāti liṅgavasena vuttaṃ, ariyā anariyāti ariyaputhujjanavasena, devāmanussā vinipātikāti upapattivasena. Disāpharaṇepi disāvibhāgaṃ akatvā sabbadisāsu ‘‘sabbe sattā’’tiādinā nayena pharaṇato anodhiso pharaṇā hoti, sabbadisāsu ‘‘sabbā itthiyo’’tiādinā nayena pharaṇato odhiso pharaṇā.
不过,这三种慈心遍满都是就安止心来说的,所以在三种情形里都应当取安止定。先说无分别遍满:「愿一切众生无怨」是一句,「愿无嗔害」是一句,「愿无忧恼」是一句,「愿他们安乐自护」是一句。这四句也都是就带来利益来说的,因为慈就是以带来利益为特相。这样,在「众生」等五种方式中,每一种各有四句安止,合计二十种安止。在分别遍满中,于「一切女人」等七种方式,每一种各有四句安止,合计二十八种安止。在方向遍满中,按「东方的一切众生」这样的方式,每一方有二十种安止,十方共二百种;按「东方的一切女人」这样的方式,每一方有二十八种安止,十方共二百八十种;两者相加,共四百八十种安止。这样,这里所说的一切安止,总计为五百二十八种。正如对慈的三种遍满作了说明,对悲、喜、舍的遍满也应当同样理解。
Yasmā pana ayaṃ tividhāpi mettāpharaṇā appanāpattacittassa vasena vuttā, tasmā tīsu vāresu appanā gahetabbā. Anodhiso pharaṇe tāva ‘‘sabbe sattā averā hontū’’ti ekā, ‘‘abyāpajjā hontū’’ti ekā ‘‘anīghā hontū’’ti ekā, ‘‘sukhī attānaṃ pariharantū’’ti ekā. Tānipi hi cattāri hitopasaṃhāravaseneva vuttāni. Hitopasaṃhāralakkhaṇā hi mettā. Iti ‘‘sattā’’tiādīsu pañcasu ākāresu catassannaṃ catassannaṃ appanānaṃ vasena vīsati appanā honti, odhiso pharaṇe ‘‘sabbā itthiyo’’tiādīsu sattasu ākāresu catassannaṃ catassannaṃ vasena aṭṭhavīsati appanā. Disāpharaṇe pana ‘‘sabbe puratthimāya disāya sattā’’tiādinā nayena ekamekissā disāya vīsati vīsati katvā dve satāni, ‘‘sabbā puratthimāya disāya itthiyo’’tiādinā nayena ekamekissā disāya aṭṭhavīsati aṭṭhavīsati katvā asīti dve satānīti cattāri satāni asīti ca appanā. Iti sabbānipi idha vuttāni aṭṭhavīsādhikāni pañca appanāsatāni honti. Yathā ca mettāya tividhena pharaṇā vuttā, tathā karuṇāmuditāupekkhānampi vuttāva hotīti veditabbaṃ.
根的章节解说
1. Indriyavāravaṇṇanā
23接着,为了说明慈心遍满的方式以及诸根的修习,说了“舍弃对一切众生的压迫”等话。其中,“压迫”是指从内在对身体造成的逼迫。“伤害”是指从外在对身体造成的损害。“热恼”是指以各种方式使内心焦灼。“耗尽”是指寿命等自然枯竭。“困扰”是指从外部对生命的干扰。“舍弃”是指用自己的心把压迫等一个一个地去除。压迫等这五个词,是从遮止慈心遍满的对立面来说的;不压迫等词,则是从慈心遍满本身来说的。“以不压迫”意思是以不压迫的方式,对一切众生修习慈,这是关联。其余诸项也是如此。“莫有怨敌,莫有痛苦,莫有痛苦者”,这三项也是遮止慈心遍满对立面的表述。“莫”字之义为“不要有”。“无怨敌,有安乐,有安乐者”,这三项是慈心遍满的表述。“无瞋害,无苦恼”这两项应知已由“有安乐”一词所含摄。“有安乐者”是显示那安乐恒常相续。“有安乐者”与“安乐地保持自己”,意义上是一回事。或者,“无瞋害、无苦恼”等词已由“以不压迫”等所含摄。“以八种方式”是指“以不压迫”等五种慈心遍满的方式,以及“无怨敌”等三种慈心遍满的方式,以这八种方式。“修习慈”是指滋润、柔软。那法是指令那利益遍满生起,即令其现前、相续,生起之义。从一切瞋害遍满中解脱,是指从与慈相对立的一切瞋害现行中,因镇伏而解脱。慈与心与解脱,这同一慈以三种方式被赞叹。
23. Atha mettūpasaṃhārākāraṃ indriyādiparibhāvanañca dassetuṃ sabbesaṃ sattānaṃ pīḷanaṃ vajjetvātiādimāha. Tattha pīḷananti abbhantarato sarīrapīḷanaṃ. Upaghātanti bāhirato sarīropaghātaṃ. Santāpanti yathā tathā vā cittasantāpanaṃ. Pariyādānanti pakatiyā jīvitādiparikkhayaṃ. Vihesanti parato jīvitaviheṭhanaṃ. Vajjetvāti pīḷanādīsu ekekaṃ attano citteneva apanetvā. Imāni pīḷanādīni pañca padāni mettopasaṃhārassa paṭipakkhavivajjanavasena vuttāni, apīḷanāyātiādīni mettopasaṃhāravasena. Apīḷanāyāti apīḷanākārena, sabbe satte mettāyatīti sambandho. Evaṃ sesesupi. Mā verino mā dukkhino mā dukkhitattāti imānipi tīṇi mettopasaṃhārassa paṭipakkhapaṭikkhepavacanāni. Mā-vacanassa mā hontūti attho. Averino sukhino sukhitattāti imāni tīṇi mettopasaṃhāravacanāni. ‘‘Abyāpajjā anīghā’’ti idaṃ dvayaṃ ‘‘sukhino’’ti vacanena saṅgahitanti veditabbaṃ. Sukhitattāti tasseva sukhassa niccappavattidassanaṃ. ‘‘Sukhitattā’’ti ca ‘‘sukhī attānaṃ pariharantū’’ti ca atthato ekaṃ. ‘‘Apīḷanāyā’’tiādīhi vā abyāpajjānīghavacanāni saṅgahitāni. Aṭṭhahākārehīti ‘‘apīḷanāyā’’tiādayo pañca mettopasaṃhārākārā ‘‘averino hontū’’tiādayo tayo mettopasaṃhārākārāti imehi aṭṭhahākārehi. Mettāyatīti siniyhati. Taṃ dhammaṃ cetayatīti taṃ hitopasaṃhāraṃ cetayati abhisandahati, pavattetīti attho. Sabbabyāpādapariyuṭṭhānehivimuccatīti mettāya paṭipakkhabhūtehi sabbehi byāpādasamudācārehi vikkhambhanato vimuccati. Mettā ca ceto ca vimutti cāti ekāyeva mettā tidhā vaṇṇitā.
无怨、安稳、快乐这三句,是把前面已经说过的各种方式简要归纳起来说的。以信而胜解等所说的五根,都是与慈相应的。在重复等六项中,依这些法而反复修习慈,就是重复。同样,修习就是多修习。庄严就是装饰。善庄严就是善加装饰、善加严饰。资具就是必需品。善资具就是善能具足必需品。眷属是依守护之义而说。此外,重复等二十八个词,是为了称叹慈的功德而说的。其中,圆满就是达到圆满的状态。俱有就是与慈俱有。俱生等词也是如此。投入就是由慈投入,或者依这些法而投入于慈,所以叫投入。沉入等词也是如此。此为寂静触,是说这慈是寂静的,触依此而起,所以说此为寂静触;这里用中性词,就像此是最上等的用法一样。善住立就是善能安住。善兴起就是善能提起。善解脱就是从各自的对立面中善能解脱。令生起,就是与慈相应而令慈生起。令照耀,就是令其显明。令发光,就是令其光亮。
Averino khemino sukhinoti imāni tīṇi padāni pubbe vutte ākāre saṅkhepena saṅgahetvā vuttāni. Saddhāya adhimuccatītiādinā nayena vuttāni pañcindriyāni mettāya sampayuttāniyeva. Āsevanātiādīsu chasu vāresu āsevīyati etehi mettāti āsevanā. Tathā bhāvanā bahulīkammaṃ. Alaṅkārāti vibhūsanā. Svālaṅkatāti suṭṭhu alaṅkatā bhūsitā. Parikkhārāti sambhārā. Suparikkhatāti suṭṭhu sambhatā. Parivārāti rakkhanaṭṭhena. Puna āsevanādīni aṭṭhavīsati padāni mettāya vaṇṇabhaṇanatthaṃ vuttāni. Tattha pāripūrīti paripuṇṇabhāvā. Sahagatāti mettāya sahagatā. Tathā sahajātādayo. Pakkhandanāti mettāya pavisanā, pakkhandati etehi mettāti vā pakkhandanā. Tathā saṃsīdanādayo. Etaṃ santanti phassanāti esā mettā santāti etehi phassanā hotīti etaṃ santanti phassanā ‘‘etadagga’’ntiādīsu (a. ni. 1.188 ādayo) viya napuṃsakavacanaṃ. Svādhiṭṭhitāti suṭṭhu patiṭṭhitā. Susamuggatāti suṭṭhu samussitā. Suvimuttāti attano attano paccanīkehi suṭṭhu vimuttā. Nibbattentīti mettāsampayuttā hutvā mettaṃ nibbattenti. Jotentīti pākaṭaṃ karonti. Patāpentīti virocenti.
2-4. 力等三种抉择的详细解释
2-4. Balādivārattayavaṇṇanā
24-2724-27. 在“根”的抉择里讲过的方法,同样可以用来理解“力”的抉择。“觉支”和“道支”这两类抉择,是依照不同名称指向同一含义的方式来说的,不是按照各自独有的特征来说的。在“道支”的抉择中,正语、正业、正命是就慈的前行阶段来说的,不是就安止定来说的,因为它们不会和慈同时生起。“一切众生”等其余抉择的含义,也应当依照“众生”抉择里讲过的方法来理解。至于修习慈的具体方法,则应当从《清净道论》中取来。
24-27. Indriyavāre vuttanayeneva balavāropi veditabbo. Bojjhaṅgamaggaṅgavārā pariyāyena vuttā, na yathālakkhaṇavasena. Maggaṅgavāre sammāvācākammantājīvā mettāya pubbabhāgavasena vuttā, na appanāvasena. Na hi ete mettāya saha bhavanti. Sabbesaṃ pāṇānantiādīnaṃ sesavārānampi sattavāre vuttanayeneva attho veditabbo. Mettābhāvanāvidhānaṃ pana visuddhimaggato (visuddhi. 1.240 ādayo) gahetabbanti.
离贪论的注释
Virāgakathāvaṇṇanā
2828. 现在,接着前面讲过的、以道为最终目标的慈心论之后,要对名为离贪、以道为先导的离贪论作前所未有的义理解释。其中,首先为了说明“厌离者离贪,由离贪而解脱”(《大品》23)这两句经文的意思,先立了总纲:离贪是道,解脱是果。接着,为了先解释词义,便说了“为什么说离贪是道”等话。其中,“离贪”(virajjati)的意思是成为离贪者。其余词语的含义,在解释道智时已经说过了。“离贪”(virāgo):因为正见本身离贪,所以称为离贪,这是它的意思。而这个离贪,因为它以离贪为所缘……中略……安住于离贪,所以也称为离贪。应当这样理解“以离贪为所缘”等五种说法的关联。其中,“以离贪为所缘”,意思是以涅槃为所缘。“以离贪为行境”,意思是以涅槃为行境。“在离贪中生起”,意思是在涅槃中生起。“住于离贪”,意思是以持续活动的方式安住于涅槃。“安立于离贪”,意思是以不退转的方式安立于涅槃。
28. Idāni maggapayojanapariyosānāya mettākathāya anantaraṃ kathitāya virāgasaṅkhātamaggapubbaṅgamāya virāgakathāya apubbatthānuvaṇṇanā. Tattha paṭhamaṃ tāva ‘‘nibbindaṃ virajjati virāgā vimuccatī’’ti (mahāva 23) vuttānaṃ dvinnaṃ suttantapadānaṃ atthaṃ niddisitukāmena virāgo maggo, vimutti phalanti uddeso ṭhapito. Tattha paṭhamaṃ vacanatthaṃ tāva niddisitukāmo kathaṃ virāgo maggotiādimāha. Tattha virajjatīti virattā hoti. Sesāni maggañāṇaniddese vuttatthāni. Virāgoti yasmā sammādiṭṭhi virajjati, tasmā virāgo nāmāti attho . So ca virāgo yasmā virāgārammaṇo…pe… virāge patiṭṭhito, tasmā ca virāgoti evaṃ ‘‘virāgārammaṇo’’tiādīnaṃ pañcannaṃ vacanānaṃ sambandho veditabbo. Tattha virāgārammaṇoti nibbānārammaṇo. Virāgagocaroti nibbānavisayo. Virāge samudāgatoti nibbāne samuppanno. Virāge ṭhitoti pavattivasena nibbāne ṭhito. Virāge patiṭṭhitoti anivattanavasena nibbāne patiṭṭhito.
涅槃也是离贪,因为涅槃是离贪的原因,所以叫离贪。以涅槃为所缘而生起:就是在以涅槃为所缘的情况下生起,或者是以“以涅槃为所缘”这种方式生起。那些与道相应的触等一切法,都以离染的意义而成为离贪,所以它们也叫作离贪。俱生:是指与正见同时生起的正思惟等七个道支。走向离贪:意思是“离贪就是道”——把离贪、也就是涅槃作为所缘对象而走向它,因此由于它以离贪为所缘,就叫作离贪;又因为它有行进的意义,就叫作道。每一个道支单独也能得到道的名称。这样,当说明每一个支都是道时,正见是道这一点也就同样被说到了。正因为如此,在说“由此道”时,是把八个道支合在一起说的。及诸佛:独觉佛也包括在内。因为他们也被称为佛,正如经中说:“比丘们,有这两种佛:如来、阿拉汉、正自觉者,以及独觉佛。”未曾有过:在无始的轮回中从未曾有过。可见:以全部修行实践而可见、可显现、可趋向,所以叫可见;或者,是一切佛陀所见的无上安乐,所以叫可见、可宣说;或者,一切苦依此而被见、被舍、被丢弃,所以叫可见。那就是这个可见之处。八支道:说的是什么呢?就是说,那一组八支的法,以借此走向涅槃的行进意义,被称为道。众多沙门、婆罗门的种种外道主张:指各种不同的沙门和婆罗门,以及持有其他见解的人。最胜:比其余的道更殊胜。最上:比其余的道更值得赞叹。首要:在面前是好的,意思是说,与其余的道相比,只有这条道在面前是好的。无上:比其余的道远远超出。殊妙:比其余的道以种种方式都更值得亲近。iti 这个词是表示原因。因此,世尊说“于诸道中,八支道最胜”,这就是他的意思。世尊确实说过——
Nibbānañca virāgoti nibbānaṃ virāgahetuttā virāgo. Nibbānārammaṇatājātāti nibbānārammaṇe jātā, nibbānārammaṇabhāvena vā jātā. Te maggasampayuttā sabbeva phassādayo dhammā virajjanaṭṭhena virāgā hontīti virāgā nāma honti. Sahajātānīti sammādiṭṭhisahajātāni sammāsaṅkappādīni satta maggaṅgāni. Virāgaṃ gacchantīti virāgo maggoti virāgaṃ nibbānaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā gacchantīti virāgārammaṇattā virāgo nāma, magganaṭṭhena maggo nāma hotīti attho. Ekekampi maggaṅgaṃ maggoti nāmaṃ labhati. Iti ekekassa aṅgassa maggatte vutte sammādiṭṭhiyāpi maggattaṃ vuttameva hoti. Tasmāyeva ca etena maggenāti aṭṭha maggaṅgāni gahetvā vuttaṃ. Buddhā cāti paccekabuddhāpi saṅgahitā. Tepi hi ‘‘dveme, bhikkhave, buddhā tathāgato ca arahaṃ sammāsambuddho paccekabuddho cā’’ti (a. ni. 2.57) vuttattā buddhāyeva . Agatanti anamatagge saṃsāre agatapubbaṃ. Disanti sakalāyapaṭipattiyā dissati apadissati abhisandahīyatīti disā, sabbabuddhehi vā paramaṃ sukhanti dissati apadissati kathīyatīti disā , sabbadukkhaṃ vā dissanti vissajjenti ujjhanti etāyāti disā. Taṃ disaṃ. Aṭṭhaṅgiko maggoti kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? Yo so aṭṭhaṅgiko dhammasamūho, so etena nibbānaṃ gacchantīti gamanaṭṭhena maggo nāmāti vuttaṃ hoti. Puthusamaṇabrāhmaṇānaṃ parappavādānanti visuṃ visuṃ samaṇānaṃ brāhmaṇānañca ito aññaladdhikānaṃ. Aggoti tesaṃ sesamaggānaṃ visiṭṭho. Seṭṭhoti sesamaggato ativiya pasaṃsanīyo. Mokkhoti mukhe sādhu, sesamaggānaṃ abhimukhe ayameva sādhūti attho. Uttamoti sesamagge ativiya uttiṇṇo. Pavaroti sesamaggato nānappakārehi saṃbhajanīyo. Itīti kāraṇatthe nipāto. Tasmā bhagavatā ‘‘maggānaṃ aṭṭhaṅgiko seṭṭho’’ti vuttoti adhippāyo. Vuttañhi bhagavatā –
八支道是诸道中最殊胜的,四谛是诸谛中最殊胜的;
离贪最为殊胜,在诸法中;在两足者当中,具眼者最为殊胜。
‘‘Maggānaṭṭhaṅgiko seṭṭho, saccānaṃ caturo padā; Virāgo seṭṭho dhammānaṃ, dvipadānañca cakkhumā’’ti. (dha. pa. 273);
这里把那个偈颂截取出来,说的是“在诸道中,八支道最殊胜”。在剩下的段落里,也应该按照这个方法以及前面所说的方式来理解其中的含义。
Taṃ idha vicchinditvā ‘‘maggānaṃ aṭṭhaṅgiko seṭṭho’’ti vuttaṃ. Sesavāresupi iminā ca nayena heṭṭhā vuttanayena ca attho veditabbo.
在“见离贪”等说法里,被称为“见”的离贪就是“见离贪”。因为“力”比“根”更殊胜,所以这里从“根”的角度先说了“力”,应当这样理解。以增上的意义说“根”等,是在解释“根”等词的含义,不是在解释“离贪”的含义。以如实之义,“谛”应当理解为谛智。“戒清净”就是正语、正业、正命。“心清净”就是正定。“见清净”就是正见、正思惟。“以解脱义”,就是从各自道所应断的烦恼中解脱出来的意义。“明”就是正见。“解脱”就是断尽式的解脱。以究竟之义来说,不死之深处——涅槃——就是道;因为通过道果的省察而被寻求、被探究,所以称为“道”。
Dassanavirāgotiādīsu dassanasaṅkhāto virāgo dassanavirāgo. Indriyaṭṭhato balassa visiṭṭhattā idha indriyato balaṃ paṭhamaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Ādhipateyyaṭṭhena indriyānītiādi indriyādīnaṃ atthavibhāvanā, na virāgassa. Tathaṭṭhena saccāti saccañāṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. Sīlavisuddhīti sammāvācākammantājīvā. Cittavisuddhīti sammāsamādhi. Diṭṭhivisuddhīti sammādiṭṭhisaṅkappā. Vimuttaṭṭhenāti taṃtaṃmaggavajjhakilesehi muttaṭṭhena. Vijjāti sammādiṭṭhi. Vimuttīti samucchedavimutti. Amatogadhaṃ nibbānaṃ pariyosānaṭṭhena maggoti maggaphalapaccavekkhaṇāhi maggīyatīti maggo.
在这个离贪的解说里,所说的诸法全都只存在于道的那一刹那。在解脱的解说里,则只存在于果的那一刹那。所以,欲和作意也都与道、果相应。
Imasmiṃ virāganiddese vuttā dhammā sabbepi maggakkhaṇeyeva. Vimuttiniddese phalakkhaṇe. Tasmā chandamanasikārāpi maggaphalasampayuttā.
29在解脱的解说里,也应该按照离贪解说中已说的方法来理解其含义。不过在这里,果因为是从止息而解脱,所以叫解脱;涅槃因为是从出离而解脱,所以叫解脱。“俱生的七支”这类说法,在这里找不到依据,所以没有提到。因为果本身就是解脱,所以只从舍弃的意义上说为解脱,就只说了这么多。其余的内容,都按照前面所说的方法来理解。
29. Virāganiddese vuttanayeneva vimuttiniddesepi attho veditabbo. Phalaṃ panettha paṭippassaddhivimuttattā vimutti, nibbānaṃ nissaraṇavimuttattā vimutti. ‘‘Sahajātāni sattaṅgānī’’tiādīni vacanāni idha na labbhantīti na vuttāni. Sayaṃ phalavimuttattā pariccāgaṭṭhena vimuttīti ettakameva vuttaṃ. Sesaṃ vuttanayamevāti.
6. 无碍解的讨论
6. Paṭisambhidākathā
转法轮品解说
1. Dhammacakkapavattanavāravaṇṇanā
3030. 现在,为了显示依据被称为离染之道的修行而成就的无碍解分类,在讲解以《转法轮经》为先导的无碍解论时,对其中未曾说过之义加以注释。首先,在经中说“在波罗奈”——波罗奈是一条河的名字,离波罗奈河不远的地方有一座城,就叫波罗奈。在波罗奈城中。“在仙人堕处鹿野苑”——因为诸仙人在这里降落和起飞,所以得到这个名字;又因为这里是给鹿群布施无畏的地方,所以称为鹿野苑。意思是说:在这里,每一位生起的诸佛的一切知者之座都会落下,他们为了转法轮而坐下。从难陀池窟经过七天,从灭尽定出定后,在阿耨达池完成洗脸等事,然后从空中来到此处;独觉佛们也在这里聚集降落;他们为了布萨和非布萨等事而集会;返回香山时,也从那里起飞。因此,由于诸仙人降落和起飞的缘故,那个地方被称为“仙人堕处”。也有读作“仙人足处”的。关于“五群比丘”——
30. Idāni virāgasaṅkhātamaggavasena siddhaṃ paṭisambhidāpabhedaṃ dassentena kathitāya dhammacakkappavattanasuttantapubbaṅgamāya paṭisambhidākathāya apubbatthānuvaṇṇanā. Suttante tāva bārāṇasiyanti bārāṇasā nāma nadī, bārāṇasāya avidūre bhavā nagarī bārāṇasī. Tassaṃ bārāṇasiyaṃ. Isipatane migadāyeti isīnaṃ patanuppatanavasena evaṃladdhanāme migānaṃ abhayadānadinnaṭṭhānattā migadāyasaṅkhāte ārāme. Tattha hi uppannuppannā sabbaññuisayo patanti, dhammacakkappavattanatthaṃ nisīdantīti attho. Nandamūlakapabbhārato sattāhaccayena nirodhasamāpattito vuṭṭhitā anotattadahe katamukhadhovanakiccā ākāsena āgantvā paccekabuddhaisayopettha samosaraṇavasena patanti , uposathatthañca anuposathatthañca sannipatanti, gandhamādanaṃ paṭigacchantā ca tato ca uppatantītipi iminā isīnaṃ patanuppatanavasena taṃ ‘‘isipatana’’nti vuccati. ‘‘Isipadana’’ntipi pāṭho. Pañcavaggiyeti –
衮丹雅、跋提、瓦帕、摩诃男和阿说示,
这五位大长老,就被称为“五群”。
‘‘Koṇḍañño bhaddiyo vappo, mahānāmo ca assaji; Ete pañca mahātherā, pañcavaggāti vuccare’’ti. –
被称为“五群比丘”的这五位比丘,组成一个品,就是“五品”。因为他们是那个五品中的成员,所以叫“五群比丘”,也就是指那五位。世尊对比丘们说:从在燃灯十力佛足下发愿开始,世尊圆满种种波罗蜜,逐渐来到最后一生;在最后一生中出家,又逐渐来到菩提道场,在那里坐在不坏金刚座上,摧破魔军。初夜时,忆念过去生;中夜时,净化天眼;后夜结束时,轰鸣、震动一万个世界界,证得一切知智。在菩提道场度过七个七天之后,因大梵天劝请而决定说法,以佛眼观察世间,为了利益世间,前往波罗奈,想要说服五群比丘,转动法轮,于是对他们说。
Evaṃ vuttānaṃ pañcannaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ vaggo pañcavaggo. Tasmiṃ pañcavagge bhavā taṃpariyāpannattāti pañcavaggiyā, te pañcavaggiye. Bhikkhū āmantesīti dīpaṅkaradasabalassa pādamūle katābhinīhārato paṭṭhāya pāramiyo pūrento anupubbena pacchimabhavaṃ patvā pacchimabhave ca katābhinikkhamano anupubbena bodhimaṇḍaṃ patvā tattha aparājitapallaṅke nisinno mārabalaṃ bhinditvā paṭhamayāme pubbenivāsaṃ anussaritvā majjhimayāme dibbacakkhuṃ visodhetvā pacchimayāmāvasāne dasasahassilokadhātuṃ unnādento sampakampento sabbaññutaṃ patvā satta sattāhāni bodhimaṇḍe vītināmetvā mahābrahmunā āyācitadhammadesanā buddhacakkhunā lokaṃ voloketvā lokānuggahena bārāṇasiṃ gantvā pañcavaggiye bhikkhū saññāpetvā dhammacakkaṃ pavattetukāmo āmantesi.
比丘们,所谓“有两种极端”,意思就是比丘们,有两种极端、两个部分。当世尊说出这句话的时候,说法的声音向下传到无间地狱,向上到达有顶天,遍满一万个世界界之后停住了。就在那个时候,有一亿八千万梵天聚集而来。太阳从西方落下,满月在东方与北娄宿星相会而升起。就在那个时候,世尊开始宣说《转法轮经》,说出了“比丘们,有两种极端……”等话。
Dveme, bhikkhave, antāti dveme, bhikkhave, koṭṭhāsā. Imassa pana vacanassa samudāhārena samudāhāranigghoso heṭṭhā avīciṃ upari bhavaggaṃ patvā dasasahassiṃ lokadhātuṃ pattharitvā aṭṭhāsi, tasmiṃyeva samaye aṭṭhārasakoṭisaṅkhā brahmāno samāgacchiṃsu. Pacchimadisāya sūriyo atthaṅgameti, puratthimāya disāya uttarāsāḷhanakkhattena yutto puṇṇacando uggacchati. Tasmiṃ samaye bhagavā dhammacakkappavattanasuttantaṃ ārabhanto ‘‘dveme, bhikkhave, antā’’tiādimāha.
这里,“出家者”是指切断在家结缚、即事物欲之后而出家。“不应亲近”就是不应习近。之所以特别说“出家者不应亲近”,是因为出家者正是修行之道的主要承载者。“沉湎于诸欲中的欲乐”是指对事物欲中的烦恼欲、或依止烦恼欲的沉溺。“低劣”即卑下。“村俗”即属于村民的。“凡愚的”即凡夫盲愚之人所惯行的。“非圣”即不是圣者;或者说,不属于清净、殊胜的诸圣者。“无益相应”即不与利益相应,意思是说不依止能带来安乐的原因。“自我折磨的修习”即折磨自己的修习,意思是给自己制造痛苦。“苦”即通过荆棘床卧等自杀式做法带来痛苦。因为苦行者们把这种修习执为“最上苦行”,为了照顾他们的心,这里没有说“低劣”;又因为这是出家者的法,所以没有说“村俗”;又因为它并非在家人所共有,所以没有说“凡愚的”。然而,有些自称出家者的人主张现法涅槃,说:“贤者们,当这个自我被五种欲功德所满足、具足并纵情享受时,贤者们,这个自我就算证得现法涅槃了。”由于他们执取这种说法,为了照顾他们的心,又因为那种法的受持在现前是快乐的,所以没有说它“苦”。沉湎欲乐不应亲近,因为它在现前是被渴爱和邪见染污的快乐,未来会招致苦的果报,而且耽溺其中的人被渴爱和邪见的束缚所缚。自我折磨的修习也不应亲近,因为它在现前是被邪见染污的苦,未来会招致苦的果报,而且耽溺其中的人被邪见的束缚所缚。“此二者”就是这两种。“不趣入”即不趋近。“中道”因为远离染污的乐与苦、处于中间,所以叫中道。正是依此而趣向涅槃,所以叫“道”。“已现等觉”即已通达。在“作眼”等语中,“作眼”是生起慧眼;“作智”是它的同义词。“为寂止”是为了烦恼的寂止。“为证智”是为了证知四谛。“为等觉”是为了觉悟四谛。“为涅槃”是为了作证涅槃。或者说,“作眼”是生起见道之智;“作智”是生起修道之智;“为寂止”是一切烦恼的寂止;“为证智”是一切法的证知;“为等觉”是阿罗汉果的等觉;“为涅槃”是烦恼与诸蕴的涅槃。关于谛的论说,已在“所应证知”的解说中说过。
Tattha pabbajitenāti gihisaṃyojanaṃ vatthukāmaṃ chetvā pabbajitena. Na sevitabbāti na valañjetabbā. Pabbajitānaṃyeva visesato paṭipattiyā bhājanabhūtattā ‘‘pabbajitena na sevitabbā’’ti vuttaṃ. Yo cāyaṃ kāmesu kāmasukhallikānuyogoti yo ca ayaṃ vatthukāmesu kilesakāmasukhassa, kilesakāmasukhanissayassa vā anuyogo. Hīnoti lāmako. Gammoti gāmavāsīnaṃ santako. Pothujjanikoti puthujjanena andhabālajanena āciṇṇo. Anariyoti na ariyo. Atha vā na visuddhānaṃ uttamānaṃ ariyānaṃ santako. Anatthasaṃhitoti na atthasaṃhito, sukhāvahakāraṇaṃ anissitoti attho. Attakilamathānuyogoti attano kilamathassa anuyogo , attano dukkhakaraṇanti attho. Dukkhoti kaṇṭakāpassayaseyyādīhi attamāraṇehi dukkhāvaho. Tapassīhi ‘‘uttamaṃ tapo’’ti gahitattā tesaṃ cittānurakkhanatthaṃ idha ‘‘hīno’’ti na vuttaṃ, pabbajitānaṃ dhammattā ‘‘gammo’’ti ca, gihīhi asādhāraṇattā ‘‘pothujjaniko’’ti ca na vuttaṃ. Tattha pana kehici pabbajitapaṭiññehi diṭṭhadhammanibbānavādehi ‘‘yato kho, bho , ayaṃ attā pañcahi kāmaguṇehi samappito samaṅgibhūto paricāreti, ettāvatā kho, bho, ayaṃ attā diṭṭhadhammanibbānappatto hotī’’ti (dī. ni. 1.94) gahitattā tesaṃ cittānurakkhanatthañca paccuppanne sukhattā ca tassa dhammasamādānassa ‘‘dukkho’’ti na vuttaṃ. Kāmasukhallikānuyogo paccuppanne taṇhādiṭṭhisaṃkiliṭṭhasukhattā āyatiñca dukkhavipākattā tadanuyuttānaṃ taṇhādiṭṭhibandhanabaddhattā ca na sevitabbo, attakilamathānuyogo paccuppanne diṭṭhisaṃkiliṭṭhadukkhattā āyatiñca dukkhavipākattā tadanuyuttānaṃ diṭṭhibandhanabaddhattā ca na sevitabbo, ete khoti te ete. Anupagammāti na upagantvā. Majjhimāti saṃkiliṭṭhasukhadukkhānaṃ abhāvā majjhe bhavāti majjhimā. Sā eva nibbānaṃ paṭipajjanti etāyāti paṭipadā. Abhisambuddhāti paṭividdhā. Cakkhukaraṇītiādīsu paññācakkhuṃ karotīti cakkhukaraṇī. Ñāṇakaraṇīti tasseva vevacanaṃ. Upasamāyāti kilesūpasamāya. Abhiññāyāti catunnaṃ saccānaṃ abhijānanatthāya. Sambodhāyāti tesaṃyeva sambujjhanatthāya. Nibbānāyāti nibbānasacchikiriyatthāya. Atha vā dassanamaggañāṇaṃ karotīti cakkhukaraṇī. Bhāvanāmaggañāṇaṃ karotīti ñāṇakaraṇī. Sabbakilesānaṃ upasamāya. Sabbadhammānaṃ abhiññāya. Arahattaphalasambodhāya. Kilesānañca khandhānañca nibbānāya. Saccakathā abhiññeyyaniddese vuttā.
世尊这样把四谛讲清楚之后,那些已经对自己生起了很大敬重的人,为了让这份敬重落到实际修行上,也为了让他们安住在修行中、亲见圣谛,世尊先让他们听到他自己证悟的次第,借此把他们的敬重引向修行本身,然后以“诸比丘,这就是苦圣谛……”等话,开示了自己证悟的次第。其中,“前所未闻”是指不是从别人那里听来的,不是跟着别人后面才听到的意思。“眼”等词的含义,后面会解释。“这就是苦圣谛,这就是苦集,这就是苦灭,这就是通往苦灭之道圣谛”——这是在有学阶段对四谛的“见通达”。“应当遍知、应当断除、应当作证、应当修习”——这是在有学阶段对四谛的“修习通达”。“已遍知、已断除、已作证、已修习”——这是在无学阶段对四谛的“省察”。
Evaṃ bhagavā saccāni pakāsetvā attani katabahumānānaṃ tesaṃ attano paṭivedhakkamaṃ sutvā paṭipattiyā bahumānāropanena paṭipattiyaṃ ṭhatvā saccappaṭivedhaṃ passanto idaṃ dukkhaṃ ariyasaccanti me, bhikkhavetiādinā attano paṭivedhakkamaṃ dassesi. Tattha ananussutesūti na anussutesu, paraṃ anugantvā assutesūti attho. Cakkhūtiādīnaṃ attho parato āvi bhavissati. Idaṃ dukkhaṃ ariyasaccaṃ, idaṃ dukkhasamudayaṃ, idaṃ dukkhanirodhaṃ, idaṃ dukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadā ariyasaccanti catunnaṃ saccānaṃ dassanapaṭivedho sekhabhūmiyaṃ. Pariññeyyaṃ pahātabbaṃ sacchikātabbaṃ bhāvetabbanti catunnaṃ saccānaṃ bhāvanāpaṭivedho sekhabhūmiyaṃyeva. Pariññātaṃ pahīnaṃ sacchikataṃ bhāvitanti catunnaṃ saccānaṃ paccavekkhaṇā asekhabhūmiyaṃ.
三转:依谛智、作智、已作智这三种转,所以有三种转,称为三转。在这里,对四圣谛如实了知“这是苦,这是苦集,这是苦灭,这是通往苦灭的道圣谛”,这样的智称为谛智。对同样的这些谛,了知应当做的事——“应当遍知、应当断除、应当证悟、应当修习”,这样的智称为作智。了知那件事已经完成的状态——“已遍知、已断除、已证悟、已修习”,这样的智称为已作智。十二行相:就是在每一个谛上各有三种行相,所以有十二种行相。智见:依这三转十二行相而生起的、称为智的见。心满意足:就是自己心里满足。因为众生都想要快乐、都厌恶痛苦,所以与喜和悦相应的心就叫自己心里满足;或者说,被喜和悦充满、占据、遍满的心,就是这个意思。欢喜赞叹:正面迎向而欢喜。记说:就是经。因为没有偈颂的经纯粹是阐明义理,所以称为记说。正在说时:就是正在被宣说的时候。这里用现在时来表达刚刚过去的事,意思是“已经说了”。离尘:就是远离贪等尘。离垢:就是远离贪等垢。因为贪等以覆盖为义叫尘,以染污为义叫垢。法眼:有的地方指初道智,有的地方指前三道智,有的地方也指第四道智。但这里只指初道智。意思是:依观智的力量,了知“凡是集起之法,那一切都是灭尽之法”而转起的,生起了法眼。
Tiparivaṭṭanti saccañāṇakiccañāṇakatañāṇasaṅkhātānaṃ tiṇṇaṃ parivaṭṭānaṃ vasena tayo parivaṭṭā assāti tiparivaṭṭaṃ. Ettha hi ‘‘idaṃ dukkhaṃ, idaṃ dukkhasamudayaṃ , idaṃ dukkhanirodhaṃ, idaṃ dukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadā ariyasacca’’nti evaṃ catūsu saccesu yathābhūtañāṇaṃ saccañāṇaṃ nāma. Tesuyeva ‘‘pariññeyyaṃ pahātabbaṃ sacchikātabbaṃ bhāvetabba’’nti evaṃ kattabbakiccajānanañāṇaṃ kiccañāṇaṃ nāma. ‘‘Pariññātaṃ pahīnaṃ sacchikataṃ bhāvita’’nti evaṃ tassa kiccassa katabhāvajānanañāṇaṃ katañāṇaṃ nāma. Dvādasākāranti tesaṃyeva ekekasmiṃ sacce tiṇṇaṃ tiṇṇaṃ ākārānaṃ vasena dvādasa ākārā assāti dvādasākāraṃ. Ñāṇadassananti etesaṃ tiparivaṭṭānaṃ dvādasannaṃ ākārānaṃ vasena uppannaṃ ñāṇasaṅkhātaṃ dassanaṃ. Attamanāti sakamanā. Sattānañhi sukhakāmattā dukkhapaṭikūlattā pītisomanassayuttamano sakamano nāma, pītisomanassehi attamanā gahitamanā byāpitamanāti vā attho. Abhinandunti abhimukhā hutvā nandiṃsu. Veyyākaraṇeti suttante. Niggāthako hi suttanto kevalaṃ atthassa byākaraṇato veyyākaraṇaṃ nāma. Bhaññamāneti kathiyamāne. Vattamānasamīpe vattamānavacanaṃ kataṃ, bhaṇiteti attho. Virajanti vigatarāgādirajaṃ. Vītamalanti vigatarāgādimalaṃ. Rāgādayo hi ajjhottharaṇaṭṭhena rajo nāma, dūsanaṭṭhena malaṃ nāma. Dhammacakkhunti katthaci paṭhamamaggañāṇaṃ, katthaci ādīni tīṇi maggañāṇāni, katthaci catutthamaggañāṇampi . Idha pana paṭhamamaggañāṇameva. Yaṃ kiñci samudayadhammaṃ, sabbaṃ taṃ nirodhadhammanti vipassanāvasena evaṃ pavattassa dhammacakkhuṃ udapādīti attho.
法轮:指的是证悟智和说法智。因为,世尊坐在菩提树下,对四圣谛以十二行相证悟的证悟智,以及坐在仙人堕处,以十二行相为开示圣谛而转起的说法智,这两者都叫法轮。因为这两者都是十力尊者的转起智。世尊以此说法彰显它时,就说为转法轮。然而,这个法轮,直到憍陈如长老与一亿八千万梵天一起安住于入流果之前,世尊只是在令它转起;当他们已安住于果位之后,才叫已转。就是针对这一点,才说“在世尊已转法轮时”。
Dhammacakketi paṭivedhañāṇe ca desanāñāṇe ca. Bodhipallaṅke nisinnassa hi bhagavato catūsu saccesu dvādasākāraṃ paṭivedhañāṇampi isipatane nisinnassa dvādasākārameva saccadesanāya pavattakadesanāñāṇampi dhammacakkaṃ nāma. Ubhayampi hetaṃ dasabalassa pavattañāṇameva. Taṃ imāya desanāya pakāsentena bhagavatā dhammacakkaṃ pavattitaṃ nāma. Taṃ panetaṃ dhammacakkaṃ yāva aññātakoṇḍaññatthero aṭṭhārasahi brahmakoṭīhi saddhiṃ sotāpattiphale na patiṭṭhāti, tāva bhagavā pavatteti nāma, patiṭṭhite pana pavattitaṃ nāma. Taṃ sandhāya ‘‘pavattite ca bhagavatā dhammacakke’’ti vuttaṃ.
地居天:就是住在地面上的天神。令声音传开:他们一下子齐声发出赞叹,说出“这是世尊……”等话,让这声音传开来。不可逆转:就是没法用“并非如此”这样的话反过来推翻。要知道:在这里聚集的诸天和梵天,在说法结束时一下子齐声发出赞叹;而没来参加集会的地居天等,听到他们各自的声音后,也发出了赞叹。其中,投生在山、树等处的,就是地居天。他们虽然也属于四大王天,但这里单独提出来说。四大王天:就是以持国、增长、广目、多闻这四位大王为天王的,所以叫四大王天。他们住在须弥山半腰,其中有住山上的,也有住空中的。他们的传承一直延伸到轮围山。戏乐懈怠天、意愤天、冷云天、热云天、月天子、日天子,这些全都住在四大王天界。三十三天:因为有三十三位众生投生在那里。也有人说,“三十三天”就是那些天众的名字。他们也有住山上的,有住空中的,他们的传承到达轮围山,夜摩天等也是这样。即使在一个天界里,天众的传承也没有不到达轮围山的。夜摩天:已经去到、走到、抵达天界快乐的天众。兜率天:满足、欢喜的天众。化乐天:除了本有的自然所缘之外,想要更快乐地享乐时,就随自己的喜好变化出种种享乐之物来享乐。他化自在天:知道他人的心念后,在他人变化出来的享乐之物中自在受用。梵身天:投身在梵天众中的天众。这里把一切具有五蕴的梵天都包括进去了。
Bhummādevāti bhūmaṭṭhakā devā. Saddamanussāvesunti ekappahāreneva sādhukāraṃ datvā etaṃ bhagavatātiādīni vadantā saddaṃ anussāvayiṃsu. Appaṭivattiyanti ‘‘nayidaṃ tathā’’ti paṭilomaṃ vattetuṃ asakkuṇeyyaṃ. Sannipatitā cettha devabrahmāno desanāpariyosāne ekappahāreneva sādhukāraṃ adaṃsu, sannipātaṃ anāgatā pana bhummadevādayo tesaṃ tesaṃ saddaṃ sutvā sādhukāramadaṃsūti veditabbaṃ. Tesu pana pabbatarukkhādīsu nibbattā bhummadevā. Te cātumahārājikapariyāpannā hontāpi idha visuṃ katvā vuttā. Cātumahārājikāti ca dhataraṭṭhavirūḷhakavirūpakkhakuverasaṅkhātā catumahārājā devatā etesanti cātumahārājikā. Te sineruvemajjhe honti. Tesu pabbataṭṭhakāpi atthi ākāsaṭṭhakāpi. Tesaṃ paramparā cakkavāḷapabbataṃ pattā. Khiḍḍāpadosikā manopadosikā sītavalāhakā uṇhavalāhakā candimā devaputto sūriyo devaputtoti ete sabbepi cātumahārājikadevalokaṭṭhā eva. Tettiṃsa janā tattha uppannāti tāvatiṃsā. Apica ‘‘tāvatiṃsā’’ti tesaṃ devānaṃ nāmamevātipi vuttaṃ. Tepi atthi pabbataṭṭhakā atthi ākāsaṭṭhakā. Tesaṃ paramparā cakkavāḷapabbataṃ pattā, tathā yāmādīnaṃ. Ekadevalokepi hi devānaṃ paramparā cakkavāḷapabbataṃ appattā nāma natthi. Dibbaṃ sukhaṃ yātā payātā sampattāti yāmā. Tuṭṭhā pahaṭṭhāti tusitā. Pakatipaṭiyattārammaṇato atirekena ramitukāmakāle yathārucite bhoge nimminitvā nimminitvā ramantīti nimmānaratī. Cittācāraṃ ñatvā paranimmitesu bhogesu vasaṃ vattentīti paranimmitavasavattī. Brahmakāye brahmaghaṭāya niyuttāti brahmakāyikā. Sabbepi pañcavokārabrahmāno gahitā.
把“那时”这个说法加以限定,就说成“那须臾”。意思是:以称为须臾的那一刹那,而不是以究竟意义上的刹那来说的。“直到梵天界”是把梵天界包括在内。“声音”就是赞叹的声音。“一万个”是拥有一万个轮围世界。“震动”是向上涌起,剧烈地震动。“遍震动”是向上涌起又向下沉落,强烈地震动。“遍涌震”是向四方传去,剧烈地涌震。菩萨为了成就正觉而入母胎时,以及菩萨从母胎出来时,大地因福德之力而震动;成正觉时,因证悟之智的威力而震动;转法轮时,因说法之智的威力,仿佛想要发出赞叹一般,大地靠地居天众的神力而震动;舍弃寿行、般涅槃时,仿佛因悲悯而承受不住内心的激荡,大地也靠地居天众的神力而震动。“无量”是广大的量。“广大”这个词,在“吃着广大、广大的嚼食”等语句中,指的是甘美;在“对广大的财富受用心不倾注”等语句中,指的是殊胜;在“这位跋差耶那贤者以广大的言辞赞叹沙门乔达摩”等语句中,指的是最上。这里则是说“广阔而广大”。“光明”是因说法之智的威力和天众的威力而生的光明。“世间”是指一万个轮围世界之内。“超胜过天众的天威”:天众的天威是这样的——所穿衣服的光明遍及十二由旬,身体装饰和宫殿也是如此。意思是说,那光明完全超胜了天众这样的天威。“优陀那”是由喜悦和智所成的感叹。“发出优陀那”就是感叹地说。“憍陈如证悟了”这句话的声音也传遍了一万个世界,停在那里。“证悟了的憍陈如”就是深深了知的憍陈如。
Tena khaṇenāti vacanaṃ visesetvā tena muhuttenāti vuttaṃ. Muhuttasaṅkhātena khaṇena, na paramatthakhaṇenāti vuttaṃ hoti. Yāva brahmalokāti brahmalokaṃ antokatvā. Saddoti sādhukārasaddo. Dasasahassīti dasasahassacakkavāḷavatī. Saṅkampīti uddhaṃ uggacchantī suṭṭhu kampi. Sampakampīti uddhaṃ uggacchantī adho okkamantī suṭṭhu pakampi. Sampavedhīti catudisā gacchantī suṭṭhu pavedhi. Sambuddhabhāvāya mātukucchiṃ okkamante ca bodhisatte tato nikkhamante ca mahāpathavī puññatejena akampittha, abhisambodhiyaṃ paṭivedhañāṇatejena. Dhammacakkappavattane desanāñāṇatejena sādhukāraṃ dātukāmā viya pathavī devatānubhāvena akampittha, āyusaṅkhārossajjane mahāparinibbāne ca kāruññena cittasaṅkhobhaṃ asahamānā viya pathavī devatānubhāvena akampittha. Appamāṇoti vuddhappamāṇo. Uḷāroti ettha ‘‘uḷārāni uḷārāni khādanīyāni khādantī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.366) madhuraṃ uḷāranti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Uḷārāya vatthabhogāya cittaṃ na namatī’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 9.20) paṇītaṃ uḷāranti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Uḷārāya khalu bhavaṃ vacchāyano samaṇaṃ gotamaṃ pasaṃsāya pasaṃsatī’’tiādīsu seṭṭhaṃ uḷāranti vuttaṃ. Idha pana ‘‘vipulo uḷāro’’ti vutto. Obhāsoti desanāñāṇānubhāvena ca devatānubhāvena ca jātaobhāso. Loketi cakkavāḷassa dasasahassiyaṃyeva. Atikkammeva devānaṃ devānubhāvanti devānaṃ ayamānubhāvo – nivatthavatthappabhā dvādasa yojanāni pharati, tathā sarīrassa alaṅkārassa vimānassa ca. Taṃ devānaṃ devānubhāvaṃ atikkamitvāyevāti attho. Udānanti somanassañāṇamayikaṃ udāhāraṃ. Udānesīti udāhari. Aññāsi vata, bho koṇḍaññoti imassapi udānassa udāharaṇaghoso dasasahassilokadhātuṃ pharitvā aṭṭhāsi. Aññāsikoṇḍaññoti bhusaṃ ñātakoṇḍaññoti attho.
在解释“眼”等词时,说到“以见之义”等等,这里其实是同一个智:像所说的应知之义那样,以完成看的作用而称为“眼”;以完成智的作用而称为“智”;以各种方式完成了知的作用而称为“慧”;以完成无余通达的作用而称为“明”;以周遍地完成照亮的作用而称为“光”——这就是这里的意思。在“法眼”等说法里也是一样,同一个智只是按作用不同而分成五种来说。“所缘”是指作为支撑的对象;“行处”是指领域范围。在“以见之义”等说法里,是把智的作用分成五种来说的。按这个道理,在三个场合中,每一处各有五法、五义,合起来就是十五法、十五义;在这十五法和十五义中,有三十种言辞,应当知道这样就是六十种智。其余圣谛也是同样的道理。在四圣谛中,每一圣谛按十五法和十五义来算,就有六十法、六十义;在这六十法和六十义中,有一百二十种言辞。也就是说,在六十法、六十义以及一百二十种言辞中,共有二百四十种智。
Cakkhuādīnaṃ niddese dassanaṭṭhenātiādīsu ekameva ñāṇaṃ yathāvuttassa neyyassa cakkhu viya dassanakiccakaraṇena cakkhu. Ñāṇakiccakaraṇena ñāṇaṃ. Nānappakārato jānanakiccakaraṇena paññā. Anavasesapaṭivedhakaraṇena vijjā. Sabbathā obhāsakiccakaraṇena āloko nāmāti attho. Cakkhuṃ dhammotiādīsupi ekaṃyeva ñāṇaṃ kiccanānattena pañcadhā vaṇṇitaṃ. Ārammaṇāti upatthambhanaṭṭhena. Gocarāti visayaṭṭhena. Dassanaṭṭhenātiādīsu ñāṇakiccaṃ pañcadhā vuttaṃ. Iminā nayena tīsu vāresu ekekasmiṃ pañca pañca katvā pannarasa dhammā, pannarasa atthā, dvīsu pannarasakesu tiṃsa niruttiyo, pannarasasu dhammesu pannarasasu atthesu tiṃsāya niruttīsūti saṭṭhi ñāṇāni veditabbāni. Sesaariyasaccesupi eseva nayo. Catūsu ariyasaccesu ekekasmiṃ ariyasacce pannarasannaṃ pannarasannaṃ dhammānaṃ atthānañca vasena saṭṭhi dhammā, saṭṭhi atthā, saṭṭhiyā dhammesu saṭṭhiyā atthesu ca vīsasataṃ niruttiyo, vīsādhikaṃ satanti attho. Saṭṭhiyā dhammesu saṭṭhiyā atthesu vīsuttarasate niruttīsūti evaṃ cattārīsañca dve ca ñāṇasatāni.
2-3. 念处等章的注释
2-3. Satipaṭṭhānavārādivaṇṇanā
31-3231-32. 在以《念处经》为开头的部分,以及以《神足经》为开头的部分,还有在《无碍解道》的解说中,应当依照同样的方法来了知其中的含义和数目。
31-32. Satipaṭṭhānasuttantapubbaṅgame iddhipādasuttantapubbaṅgame ca paṭisambhidāniddese imināva nayena attho ca gaṇanā ca veditabbā.
4-8. 七位菩萨品等的解说
4-8. Sattabodhisattavārādivaṇṇanā
33-3733-37. 关于七位菩萨的经典,在每一部经里,集谛方面有眼等五法,灭谛方面有五法,共十法;集谛方面有见义等五义,灭谛方面有五义,共十义。依这些来算,就有二十种言辞表达和四十种智。把七部经合在一起计算,上面说的数目就很容易明白了。在依一切知智而说的无碍解道解说里,针对每一个根本词下的“已知、已见、已识、已证、已触、以慧了知”这五个表述,每一个表述中都有眼等五法和见义等五义,按五组各五来算,就是二十五法、二十五义,言辞和智则是这个数目的两倍。把五个表述合为一组来说时,也是五次二十五,即一百二十五法、一百二十五义,言辞和智则是这个数目的两倍。这里说的“两个半百”,就是二百五十。蕴等部分也是同样的道理。按照这个方式,在谛品类和无碍解品类中,法等的数目也应当这样了知。
33-37. Sattannaṃ bodhisattānaṃ suttantesu ekekasmiṃyeva samudaye cakkhādayo pañca, nirodhe pañcāti dasa dhammā, samudaye dassanaṭṭhādayo pañca, nirodhe pañcāti dasa atthā, tesaṃ vasena vīsati niruttiyo cattārīsaṃ ñāṇāni. Satta ekato katvā vuttagaṇanā suviññeyyā eva. Sabbaññutaññāṇavasena vuttapaṭisambhidāniddese ekekamūlakesu ‘‘ñāto diṭṭho vidito sacchikato phassito paññāyā’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.121) imesu pañcasu vacanesu ekekasmiṃyeva cakkhādayo pañca, dassanaṭṭhādayo pañcāti pañcapañcakānaṃ vasena pañcavīsati dhammā, pañcavīsati atthā, taddiguṇā niruttiyo, taddiguṇāni ñāṇāni ñeyyāni. Pañca ekato katvā vuttavārepi pañcakkhattuṃ pañca pañcavīsati katvā pañcavīsasataṃ dhammā, pañcavīsasataṃ atthā, taddiguṇā niruttiyo, taddiguṇāni ñāṇāni ñeyyāni. Aḍḍhateyyānīti cettha dve satāni ca paññāsañca. Khandhādīsupi eseva nayo. Imināva nayena saccavārapaṭisambhidāvāre ca dhammādigaṇanā veditabbā.
第九品 六佛法品的解说
9. Chabuddhadhammavāravaṇṇanā
3838. 在“佛法品”中,“一个半百”就是六次二十五,也就是一百五十。言辞是它的两倍,智又是言辞的两倍。在“无碍解处”中,也就是关于无碍解的部分。“八百五十法”是这样算的:最初所说的四圣谛有六十,四念处有六十,四正勤有六十,七菩萨授记有七十,神通处等五处有一百二十五,蕴处等五处有一百二十五,再加上四圣谛有一百,四无碍解有一百,六佛法有一百五十,这样合计就是八百五十法。与此相应,义的数量也是这么多。同样地,在谛等三处有言辞一百二十,在七授记有言辞一百四十,在神通处等和蕴处等各有言辞二百五十,在圣谛和无碍解各有言辞二百,在佛法有言辞三百,这样合计就是一千七百种言辞。同样地,在谛等三处各有智二百四十,在七授记有智二百八十,在神通处等和蕴处等各有智五百,在圣谛和无碍解各有智四百,在佛法有智六百,这样合计就是三千四百种智。
38. Buddhadhammavāre diyaḍḍhasatanti chakkhattuṃ pañcavīsati satañca paññāsañca honti, taddiguṇā niruttiyo taddiguṇāni ñāṇāni. Paṭisambhidādhikaraṇeti paṭisambhidādhikāre. Aḍḍhanavadhammasatānīti paṭhamaṃ vuttesu catūsu saccesu saṭṭhi, catūsu satipaṭṭhānesu saṭṭhi, catūsu sammappadhānesu saṭṭhi, sattabodhisattaveyyākaraṇesu sattati, abhiññaṭṭhādīsu pañcasu pañcavīsasataṃ, khandhaṭṭhādīsu pañcasu pañcavīsasataṃ, puna catūsu ariyasaccesu sataṃ, catūsu paṭisambhidāsu sataṃ, chasu buddhadhammesu diyaḍḍhasatanti evaṃ aṭṭhasatāni ca paññāsañca dhammā honti. Evaṃ atthāpi tattakā eva honti. Evameva saccādīsu tīsu ṭhānesu vīsasataṃ niruttiyo, sattasu veyyākaraṇesu cattārīsasataṃ niruttiyo, abhiññaṭṭhādīsu khandhaṭṭhādīsu ca aḍḍhateyyāni aḍḍhateyyāni niruttisatāni, ariyasaccesu paṭisambhidāsu ca dve dve niruttisatāni, buddhadhammesu tīṇi niruttisatānīti evaṃ niruttisahassañca sattaniruttisatāni ca honti. Evameva saccādīsu tīsu ṭhānesu cattārīsādhikāni dve dve ñāṇasatāni, sattasu veyyākaraṇesu asītiadhikāni dve ñāṇasatāni, abhiññaṭṭhādīsu khandhaṭṭhādīsu ca pañcapañcañāṇasatāni , saccesu paṭisambhidāsu ca cattāri cattāri ñāṇasatāni, buddhadhammesu cha ñāṇasatānīti evaṃ tīṇi ca ñāṇasahassāni cattāri ca ñāṇasatāni hontīti.
7. 法轮论
7. Dhammacakkakathā
1. 谛品注释
1. Saccavāravaṇṇanā
3939. 再者,以《转法轮经》为先行,对所说的法轮之论作未显之义的解释。其中,以苦为事者:因为通过一次现观,苦就是他们的所依,所以叫以苦为事者。为了特别区分这个苦,又说以谛为事者等。其中,以谛为所缘者:谛是他们的所缘和依托,所以叫以谛为所缘。以谛为行境者:谛是他们的行境和范围,所以叫以谛为行境。为谛所摄者:被道谛所摄。属于谛者:依赖于道谛。于谛中生起者:通过遍知苦,在苦谛中生起。同样,它们也就安住并确立在那一谛中。
39. Puna dhammacakkappavattanasuttantameva pubbaṅgamaṃ katvā kathitāya dhammacakkakathāya apubbatthānuvaṇṇanā. Tattha dukkhavatthukāti ekābhisamayavasena dukkhaṃ vatthu etesanti dukkhavatthukā. Tadeva dukkhaṃ visesetvā saccavatthukātiādimāha. Tattha saccaṃ ārammaṇaṃ upatthambho etesanti saccārammaṇā. Saccaṃ gocaro visayo etesanti saccagocarā. Saccasaṅgahitāti maggasaccena saṅgahitā. Saccapariyāpannāti maggasaccāyattā. Sacce samudāgatāti dukkhaparijānanena dukkhasacce samuppannā. Tathā tattheva ṭhitā patiṭṭhitā ca.
4040. 现在,为了说明前面所说的“世尊已转法轮”中的法轮,论师开始说“法轮”等话。其中,法轮有两种:证悟法轮和教说法轮。证悟法轮是在菩提树下发生的,教说法轮是在仙人堕处发生的。“既转动法又是轮”,说的是证悟法轮;“既转动轮又是法”,说的是教说法轮。怎么理解呢?世尊坐在菩提树下,在圣道生起的那一刹那,转动了根、力、觉支、道支等种种法;而那个法因为能摧破烦恼和敌人,就像攻击用的轮子一样转动,所以也是“轮”。世尊在转动法的同时,就是在转动那个轮。这样一来,就表达了“法本身就是轮”这个持业释复合词的含义。世尊坐在仙人堕处,在说法的那一刹那,在应受调伏者的心相续中,转动了类似攻击之轮的教说之轮——因为它是为了摧破烦恼和敌人而转动的;同时,也在应受调伏者的心相续中,转动了根、力、觉支、道支等种种法轮。这样一来,就表达了“法和轮两者合起来叫法轮”这个并列复合词的含义。不过,因为有转动者才会有转动这件事,所以各处虽然都用了“转动”一词,但应当理解为:是从“转动的意义”上才称之为“轮”。至于“依法而转”等说法,应当知道全都是针对教说法轮而说的。
40. Idāni ‘‘pavattite ca bhagavatā dhammacakke’’ti vuttaṃ dhammacakkaṃ niddisitukāmo dhammacakkantiādimāha. Tattha duvidhaṃ dhammacakkaṃ paṭivedhadhammacakkaṃ desanādhammacakkañca. Paṭivedhadhammacakkaṃ bodhipallaṅke, desanādhammacakkaṃ isipatane. Dhammañca pavatteti cakkañcāti paṭivedhadhammacakkaṃ vuttaṃ, cakkañca pavatteti dhammañcāti desanādhammacakkaṃ. Kathaṃ? Bhagavā hi bodhipallaṅke nisinno maggakkhaṇe indriyabalabojjhaṅgamaggaṅgādibhedaṃ dhammañca pavatteti, soyeva ca dhammo kilesasattughātāya pavattanato paharaṇacakkaṃ viyāti cakkañca. Dhammaṃ pavattentoyeva bhagavā taṃ cakkaṃ pavatteti nāma. Etena dhammoyeva cakkanti kammadhārayasamāsatā vuttā hoti. Isipatane nisinno bhagavā dhammadesanakkhaṇe veneyyasantāne kilesasattughātāya pavattanato paharaṇacakkasadisaṃ desanācakkañca pavatteti, veneyyasantāne indriyabalabojjhaṅgamaggaṅgādibhedaṃ dhammacakkañca pavatteti. Etena dhammo ca cakkañca dhammacakkanti dvandasamāsatā vuttā hoti. Yasmā pana pavattake sati pavattanā nāma hoti, tasmā sabbatthāpi ‘‘pavattetī’’ti vuttaṃ, pavattanaṭṭhena pana ‘‘cakka’’nti vuttaṃ hotīti veditabbaṃ. Dhammena pavattetīti dhammacakkantiādīni desanādhammacakkameva sandhāya vuttānīti veditabbāni.
在这里,“依法而转”的意思是:因为法本身就是如实存在的,所以所转的轮就是法轮,这样说是在表达这个意思。“以法行而转”的意思是:在应当被调伏者的心相续中,为了法的利益而转动的轮,就是法轮,这样说是在表达这个意思。“住立于法”等说法,则是在表明世尊本身就是法、是法的主人。正如经中所说:“贤友,这位世尊是知者、见者,是眼、是智、是法、是梵,是说者、转者,是义的引导者、不死之法的施予者、法主、如来。”(中部1.203)因此,通过这些话,说的就是“法之轮”,也就是法轮。“住”是指以成为主体的状态而住。“确立”是指以不动摇的状态而确立。“得自在”是指达到了主宰的状态。“达彼岸”是指达到了顶点。“得无所畏”是指达到了无所畏惧的状态。而“令人住立于法”等话,则是着眼于应当被调伏者的心相续而说的。通过这些话,也说明了因法主性以及为了法的利益而转动的轮。“恭敬法”等话,说的则是为了法的利益而转动的轮。因为一个人以恭敬等方式推动法,就是在为法的利益而推动。“恭敬法”是指像使法成为善作之法那样去做。“尊重法”是指对法生起尊重,从而尊重它。“敬重法”是指把法当作可爱、值得修习的,并这样安住。“供养法”是指指称该法,以说法与修行之供养来作供养。“礼敬法”是指以恭敬、尊重等方式对法表现出谦卑的行为。“以法为幢、以法为旗”是指把法像幢一样放在前面,像旗一样高举起来而行动,因此成为以法为幢、以法为旗。“以法为主”是指从法主而来,并且以修习之法为准来做一切行为,因此成为以法为主。而那个法轮是“不可逆转”的,因为任何人都无法使它逆转,所以说它是以不可阻挡的方式转动的。因此,那个法因为具有转动的意义,所以被称为“轮”。
Tattha dhammena pavattetīti yathāsabhāvattā dhammena pavattaṃ cakkanti dhammacakkanti vuttaṃ hoti. Dhammacariyāya pavattetīti veneyyasantāne dhammatthāya pavattaṃ cakkanti dhammacakkanti vuttaṃ hoti. Dhamme ṭhitotiādīhi bhagavato dhammabhūtatā dhammassāmitā ca vuttā hoti. Yathāha – ‘‘so hāvuso, bhagavā jānaṃ jānāti passaṃ passati cakkhubhūto ñāṇabhūto dhammabhūto brahmabhūto vattā pavattā atthassa ninnetā amatassa dātā dhammassāmī tathāgato’’ti (ma. ni. 1.203). Tasmā tehi dhammassa cakkanti dhammacakkanti vuttaṃ hoti. Ṭhitoti visayībhāvena ṭhito. Patiṭṭhitoti acalabhāvena patiṭṭhito. Vasippattoti issarabhāvaṃ patto. Pāramippattoti koṭippatto. Vesārajjappattoti visāradabhāvaṃ patto. Dhamme patiṭṭhāpentotiādīhi veneyyasantānamapekkhitvā vuttehi pana vacanehi dhammassāmitāya ca dhammatthāya cakkanti vuttaṃ hoti. Dhammaṃ sakkarontotihaādīhi dhammatthāya cakkanti vuttaṃ hoti. Yo hi dhammaṃ sakkārādivasena pavatteti, so dhammatthaṃ pavatteti. Dhammaṃ sakkarontoti yathā kato so dhammo sukato hoti, evameva naṃ karonto. Dhammaṃ garuṃ karontoti tasmiṃ gāravuppattiyā taṃ garuṃ karonto. Dhammaṃ mānentoti dhammaṃ piyañca bhāvanīyañca katvā viharanto. Dhammaṃ pūjentoti taṃ apadisitvā desanāpaṭipattipūjāya pūjaṃ karonto. Dhammaṃ apacāyamānoti tasseva dhammassa sakkāragarukārehi nīcavuttitaṃ karonto. Dhammaddhajo dhammaketūti taṃ dhammaṃ dhajamiva purakkhatvā ketumiva ca ukkhipitvā pavattiyā dhammaddhajo dhammaketu ca hutvāti attho. Dhammādhipateyyoti dhammādhipatito āgato bhāvanādhammavaseneva ca sabbakiriyānaṃ karaṇena dhammādhipateyyo hutvā. Taṃ kho pana dhammacakkaṃ appaṭivattiyanti kenaci nivattetuṃ asakkuṇeyyatāya appaṭihatapavattitā vuttā. Tasmā so dhammo pavattanaṭṭhena cakkanti vuttaṃ hoti.
信根是法,它使那法转起。意思是:在应受调教者的心相续中,通过生起与道相应的信根,他使那信根之法转起。其余的根也是如此。“谛”是指谛智。“观”和“明”就是道智本身。“无生智”是指阿罗汉果的智。那智也是在应受调教者的心相续中使之转起;并且,在使证悟涅槃发生时,也可以说它正在使之转起。
Saddhindriyaṃ dhammo, taṃ dhammaṃ pavattetīti veneyyasantāne maggasampayuttasaddhindriyuppādanena taṃ saddhindriyaṃ dhammaṃ pavattetīti attho. Eseva nayo sesesupi. Saccāti saccañāṇāni. Vipassanā ca vijjā ca maggañāṇameva. Anuppāde ñāṇanti arahattaphale ñāṇaṃ. Tampi veneyyasantāne pavattetiyeva, nibbānañca paṭivedhaṃ karonto pavattetiyeva nāma.
在集转分等处,先指出“以集为依处”“以灭为依处”“以道为依处”这些区别性的词句,然后作了简略说明。在这里也一样,应当依照前面所说的方式,按最初所说的道理来理解。
Samudayavārādīsu samudayavatthukā nirodhavatthukā maggavatthukāti visesapadaṃ dassetvā saṅkhittā. Etthāpi vuttasadisaṃ paṭhamaṃ vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ.
《念处诸分》等的注释
2-3. Satipaṭṭhānavārādivaṇṇanā
41-4241-42. 以念处和神足为前导的转分,也是依圣道刹那来说的。这些地方也都是先指出各自不同的词句,然后作简要说明。
41-42. Satipaṭṭhānaiddhipādapubbaṅgamavārāpi maggakkhaṇavasena vuttā. Tepi tattha tattha visesapadaṃ dassetvā saṅkhittāti.
8. 出世间论
8. Lokuttarakathā
出世间论的注释
Lokuttarakathāvaṇṇanā
4343. 现在,在讲完与出世间法相关的法轮之论之后,紧接着要解释前面还没讲过的出世间论。其中,“出世间”这个词的含义,在释义部分会说明。所谓“四念处”等三十七种菩提分法,是随各自相应而与道和果相应的法。它们因为具有觉悟的意义,所以称为“菩提”;又因为处在圣者的这一边,所以叫“菩提分法”。“处在这一边”的意思是,它们处在有帮助的状态中。在这些所缘上,心进入、投入并现起,所以叫“现起”;念本身就是现起,所以叫“念处”。对于身、受、心、法,它通过取不净、苦、无常、无我的方式,以及通过断除净想、乐想、常想、我想的作用而运作,因此有四种分别。所以称为“四念处”。以这些来努力,所以叫“努力”;清净的努力,叫“正勤”;或者以正确的方式努力,所以叫“正勤”;又因为清净,远离烦恼的颠倒运作,并且能带来利益和安乐,是最殊胜的,所以叫“正勤”。这是精进的同义词。它成办两种作用:对已生和未生的不善,令断除和令不生起;对未生和已生的善,令生起和令安住。因此有四种。所以称为“四正勤”。从成就的角度说,以成功之义,或者以“众生依此而成功、增长、达到殊胜”之义,这叫“如意”;与它相应、作为前导,以及作为果、作为前行之因,所以是“如意之足”,即“如意足”。它依欲、精进、心、观而有四种。所以称为“四如意足”。由于能制伏不信、懈怠、放逸、散乱、愚痴,以制伏、增上之义,所以叫“根”。由于不被不信等制伏,以不动摇之义,所以叫“力”。这两者都依信、精进、念、定、慧而有五种。所以称为“五根”“五力”。而对于能觉悟的众生来说,以念等作为支分,这七法是“觉支”;以出离之义,正见等八法是“道支”。因此说“七觉支”“八支圣道”。
43. Idāni lokuttaradhammavatiyā dhammacakkakathāya anantaraṃ kathitāya lokuttarakathāya apubbatthānuvaṇṇanā. Tattha lokuttarapadassa attho niddesavāre āvi bhavissati. Cattāro satipaṭṭhānātiādayo sattatiṃsa bodhipakkhiyadhammā yathāyogaṃ maggaphalasampayuttā. Te bujjhanaṭṭhena bodhīti evaṃladdhanāmassa ariyassa pakkhe bhavattā bodhipakkhiyā nāma. Pakkhe bhavattāti upakārabhāve ṭhitattā. Tesu ārammaṇesu okkantitvā pakkhanditvā upaṭṭhānato upaṭṭhānaṃ, satiyeva upaṭṭhānaṃ satipaṭṭhānaṃ. Kāyavedanācittadhammesu panassa asubhadukkhāniccānattākāragahaṇavasena subhasukhaniccaattasaññāpahānakiccasādhanavasena ca pavattito catudhā bhedo hoti. Tasmā cattāro satipaṭṭhānāti vuccati. Padahanti etenāti padhānaṃ, sobhanaṃ padhānaṃ sammappadhānaṃ, sammā vā padahanti etenāti sammappadhānaṃ, sobhanaṃ vā taṃ kilesavirūpapavattavirahitato padhānañca hitasukhanipphādakaṭṭhena seṭṭhabhāvāvahanato padhānabhāvakaraṇato vāti sammappadhānaṃ. Vīriyassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Tayidaṃ uppannānuppannānaṃ akusalānaṃ pahānānuppattikiccaṃ, anuppannuppannānañca kusalānaṃ uppattiṭṭhitikiccaṃ sādhayatīti catubbidhaṃ hoti. Tasmā cattāro sammappadhānāti vuccati. Nipphattipariyāyena ijjhanaṭṭhena, ijjhanti etāya sattā iddhā vuddhā ukkaṃsagatā hontīti iminā vā pariyāyena iddhi, tassā sampayuttāya pubbaṅgamaṭṭhena phalabhūtāya pubbabhāgakāraṇaṭṭhena ca iddhiyā pādoti iddhipādo. So chandavīriyacittavīmaṃsāvasena catubbidhova hoti. Tasmā cattāro iddhipādāti vuccati. Assaddhiyakosajjapamādavikkhepasammohānaṃ abhibhavanato abhibhavanasaṅkhātena adhipatiyaṭṭhena indriyaṃ. Assaddhiyādīhi anabhibhavanīyato akampiyaṭṭhena balaṃ. Tadubhayampi saddhāvīriyasatisamādhipaññāvasena pañcavidhaṃ hoti. Tasmā pañcindriyāni pañca balānīti vuccanti. Bujjhanakasattassa pana aṅgabhāvena satiādayo satta dhammā bojjhaṅgā, niyyānaṭṭhena ca sammādiṭṭhiādayo aṭṭha maggaṅgā honti. Tena vuccati satta bojjhaṅgā ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggoti.
这三十七种菩提分法,在世间观智正在运作的前分阶段:以十四种方式观察身体时,就是身随观念处;以九种方式观察感受时,就是受随观念处;以十六种方式观察心时,就是心随观念处;以五种方式观察法时,就是法随观念处。在这个生命体当中,看到自己先前未曾生起、而在他人已生起的不善法,心想:“如果照着那样去做,那种不善就会生起;我不会照着那样去做,这样那种不善就不会在我身上生起。”为了令它不生起而努力时,就是第一正勤。看到自己已经现行、已经生起的不善法,为了断除它而努力时,就是第二正勤。在这个生命体当中,为了令先前没有生起的禅那或观智生起而努力时,就是第三正勤。为了使已经生起的善法不退失,而反复令它生起时,就是第四正勤。以欲为主导来令善法生起时,就是欲神足;以精进为主导时,就是精进神足;以心为主导时,就是心神足;以观择为主导时,就是观神足。远离邪语时,就是正语;远离邪业时,就是正业;远离邪命时,就是正命。这些是在不同心识中获得的。但在四种圣道的刹那,它们是在同一个心识中获得的。在果的刹那,除了四种正勤之外,其余三十三种可以获得。当这些法在同一个心识中获得时,只有一种以涅槃为所缘的念,由于它能完成舍弃对身体等事物的净想等作用,所以被称为“四种念处”。同样,只有一个精进,由于它能完成令未生的不善不生起等作用,所以被称为“四种正勤”。至于其余各组,则没有增减。
Iti ime sattatiṃsa bodhipakkhiyā dhammā pubbabhāge lokiyavipassanāya vattamānāya cuddasavidhena kāyaṃ pariggaṇhato ca kāyānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānaṃ, navavidhena vedanaṃ pariggaṇhato ca vedanānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānaṃ, soḷasavidhena cittaṃ pariggaṇhato ca cittānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānaṃ, pañcavidhena dhamme pariggaṇhato ca dhammānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānaṃ. Iti imasmiṃ attabhāve anuppannapubbaṃ parassa uppannaṃ akusalaṃ disvā ‘‘yathā paṭipannassa tassa taṃ uppannaṃ, na tathā paṭipajjissāmi, evaṃ me etaṃ nuppajjissatī’’ti tassa anuppādāya vāyamanakāle paṭhamaṃ sammappadhānaṃ, attano samudācārappattamakusalaṃ disvā tassa pahānāya vāyamanakāle dutiyaṃ, imasmiṃ attabhāve anuppannapubbaṃ jhānaṃ vā vipassanaṃ vā uppādetuṃ vāyamantassa tatiyaṃ, uppannaṃ yathā na parihāyati, evaṃ punappunaṃ uppādentassa catutthaṃ sammappadhānaṃ. Chandaṃ dhuraṃ katvā kusaluppādanakāle chandiddhipādo, vīriyaṃ, cittaṃ, vīmaṃsaṃ dhuraṃ katvā kusaluppādanakāle vīmaṃsiddhipādo. Micchāvācāya viramaṇakāle sammāvācā , micchākammantā, micchājīvā viramaṇakāle sammājīvoti evaṃ nānācittesu labbhanti. Catumaggakkhaṇe pana ekacitte labbhanti, phalakkhaṇe ṭhapetvā cattāro sammappadhāne avasesā tettiṃsa labbhanti. Evaṃ ekacitte labbhamānesu cetesu ekāva nibbānārammaṇā sati kāyādīsu subhasaññādipahānakiccasādhanavasena ‘‘cattāro satipaṭṭhānā’’ti vuccati. Ekameva ca vīriyaṃ anuppannuppannānaṃ anuppādādikiccasādhanavasena ‘‘cattāro sammappadhānā’’ti vuccati. Sesesu hāpanavaḍḍhanaṃ natthi.
九种是以一种方式,一种是以两种方式,还有以四种和五种方式。
它们有八种和九种,如此它们成为六种。
Nava ekavidhā eko, dvedhātha catupañcadhā; Aṭṭhadhā navadhā ceva, iti chaddhā bhavanti te.
九种是一类:欲、心、喜、轻安、舍、思、语、业、命这九种,按欲神足等分类来说,都只是单一的一类,不归入其他类别。一种分两种:信,按根和力分为两种。然后一分为四、五种:意思是另一种分为四种,还有一种分为五种。其中,定这一种,按根、力、觉支、道支分为四种;慧则按这四种再加上神足那一类,分为五种。一分为八种、九种:意思是另一种分为八种,还有一种分为九种。念,按四念处、根、力、觉支、道支分为八种;精进,按四正勤、神足、根、力、觉支、道支分为九种。这样——
Navaekavidhāti chando cittaṃ pīti passaddhi upekkhā saṅkappo vācā kammanto ājīvoti ime nava chandiddhipādādivasena ekavidhāva honti, aññakoṭṭhāsaṃ na bhajanti. Eko dvedhāti saddhā indriyabalavasena dvedhā ṭhitā. Atha catupañcadhāti athañño eko catudhā, añño pañcadhā ṭhitoti attho. Tattha samādhi eko indriyabalabojjhaṅgamaggaṅgavasena catudhā ṭhito, paññā tesaṃ catunnaṃ iddhipādakoṭṭhāsassa ca vasena pañcadhā. Aṭṭhadhā navadhā cevāti aparo eko aṭṭhadhā, eko navadhā ṭhitoti attho. Catusatipaṭṭhānaindriyabalabojjhaṅgamaggaṅgavasena sati aṭṭhadhā ṭhitā, catusammappadhānaiddhipādaindriyabalabojjhaṅgamaggaṅgavasena vīriyaṃ navadhāti. Evaṃ –
这十四种,是互不混杂的菩提分法。
按类别分,有七种;按细分,有三十七种。
从各自完成自己的作用来说,以及从自性被解说的角度来说;
一切都在圣道生起时一同生起。
Cuddaseva asambhinnā, hontete bodhipakkhiyā; Koṭṭhāsato sattavidhā, sattatiṃsa pabhedato. Sakiccanipphādanato, sarūpena ca vuttito; Sabbeva ariyamaggassa, sambhave sambhavanti te.
这样,在说明了与道果相应的三十七种菩提分法之后,又把它们归纳到道果里,说为“四圣道和四沙门果”。“沙门性”就是沙门的状态,这是对四种圣道的称呼。沙门性的果,就叫沙门果。而涅槃则不与任何这些法混杂。因此应当知道:从详细来说,按三十七菩提分、四道、四果和涅槃来算,有四十六种出世间法;从简略来说,按四道、四果和涅槃来算,有九种出世间法;再进一步简略,按道、果和涅槃来算,有三种出世间法。当说到念处等以及道果是出世间法时,与它们相应的触等法也就同样被说为出世间法了。不过,这里是按照主要修行法来宣说念处等的。在《阿毗达摩》中解说出世间法时,也已经说明了与道果相应的触等法的出世间性。
Evaṃ maggaphalasampayutte sattatiṃsa bodhipakkhiyadhamme dassetvā puna te maggaphalesu saṅkhipitvā cattāro ariyamaggā cattāri ca sāmaññaphalānīti āha. Samaṇabhāvo sāmaññaṃ, catunnaṃ ariyamaggānametaṃ nāmaṃ. Sāmaññānaṃ phalāni sāmaññaphalāni. Nibbānaṃ pana sabbehi asammissameva. Iti vitthārato sattatiṃsabodhipakkhiyacatumaggacatuphalanibbānānaṃ vasena chacattālīsa lokuttaradhammā, tato saṅkhepena catumaggacatuphalanibbānānaṃ vasena nava lokuttaradhammā, tatopi saṅkhepena maggaphalanibbānānaṃ vasena tayo lokuttaradhammāti veditabbaṃ. Satipaṭṭhānādīnaṃ maggaphalānañca lokuttaratte vutte taṃsampayuttānaṃ phassādīnampi lokuttarattaṃ vuttameva hoti. Padhānadhammavasena pana satipaṭṭhānādayova vuttā. Abhidhamme (dha. sa. 277 ādayo, 505 ādayo) ca lokuttaradhammaniddese maggaphalasampayuttānaṃ phassādīnaṃ lokuttarattaṃ vuttamevāti.
度世间意思是超越世间。这里所有这类现在时的说法,都是针对四种圣道而说的。因为入流道能度过恶趣世间,一来道能度过欲界世间的一部分,不来道能度过整个欲界世间,阿拉汉道能度过色界和无色界世间。超出世间意思是从世间升出。从世间和从世间这两种说法,只是把同一个从格的形式加以区分展示出来。正越世间说的就是前面已经讲过的意思。在那里没有顾及前缀正的含义,而这里则是连同前缀正的含义一起说的。已正越世间者意思是如前面所说,已经正确地超越了世间。这里所有这类过去时的说法,都是针对果与涅槃而说的。因为入流果等果位,正是超越了如前所说的世间而安住;涅槃则恒常超越一切世间而安住。超胜于世间意思是比世间更为超胜、更为殊胜。这是针对一切出世间法而说的。脱离意思是出离、离开。已脱离意思是已经出离。不住于世间等十八种说法,都适用于一切出世间法。不住是说因为不隶属于世间。于世间不染着意思是,虽然它们存在于五蕴相续中,却不染着于世间。不被世间染着意思是,对于尚未证悟的人来说,不以任何心染着;对于已经证悟的人来说,即使以不善心或不放逸心也不染着。无染、无著是通过前缀来加以区分说明的。
Lokaṃ tarantīti lokaṃ atikkamanti. Sabbamidha īdisaṃ vattamānakālavacanaṃ cattāro ariyamagge sandhāya vuttaṃ. Sotāpattimaggo hi apāyalokaṃ tarati, sakadāgāmimaggo kāmāvacaralokekadesaṃ tarati, anāgāmimaggo kāmāvacaralokaṃ tarati, arahattamaggo rūpārūpāvacaralokaṃ tarati. Lokā uttarantīti lokā uggacchanti. Lokatoti ca lokamhāti ca tadeva nissakkavacanaṃ visesetvā dassitaṃ. Lokaṃ samatikkamantīti paṭhamaṃ vuttatthameva. Tattha upasaggatthaṃ anapekkhitvā vuttaṃ, idha saha upasaggatthena vuttaṃ. Lokaṃ samatikkantāti yathāvuttaṃ lokaṃ sammā atikkantā. Sabbamidha īdisaṃ atītakālavacanaṃ phalanibbānāni sandhāya vuttaṃ, sotāpattiphalādīni hi yathāvuttaṃ lokaṃ atikkamitvā ṭhitāni, sadā nibbānaṃ sabbalokaṃ atikkamitvā ṭhitaṃ. Lokena atirekāti lokato adhikabhūtā. Idaṃ sabbepi lokuttaradhamme sandhāya vuttaṃ. Nissarantīti niggacchanti. Nissaṭāti niggatā. Loke na tiṭṭhantītiādīni aṭṭhārasa vacanāni sabbalokuttaresupi yujjanti. Na tiṭṭhantīti loke apariyāpannattā vuttaṃ. Loke na limpantīti khandhasantāne vattamānāpi tasmiṃ na limpantīti attho. Lokena na limpantīti akatapaṭivedhānaṃ kenaci cittena, katapaṭivedhānaṃ akusalena appamattenapi cittena na limpantīti attho. Asaṃlittā anupalittāti upasaggena visesitaṃ.
“已解脱”:其实就是用不同的词来说明“不染着”这个状态。因为,无论谁在什么地方、以什么方式不染着,他们就在那里、以那种方式成为已解脱。“从世间已解脱”等三句,是依从格来说的。“已脱离系缚”:是对“已解脱”这个状态的进一步说明。因为,无论谁在什么地方、以什么方式、从什么状态解脱出来,他们就在那里、以那种方式、从那种状态被称为已脱离系缚。“从世间得以清净”:意思是清洗掉世间的尘垢之后,从世间得到清净。“得以清净”:就是以前缀特显同一清净义。“出起”:已升起。“逆转”:反转而离开。“不执著”:不黏着。“不被执取”:不被抓住。“不被系缚”:不被压迫。“断除”:使(世间)不再生起。正如由于世间已被断除,同样“从世间已清净”等语也就成立了。“止息”:使之完全寂灭。“非道”等四句,在一切出世间法中都适用。“非道”:不是道路。“非去处”:不是依止处。“非境”:不是所依。“不共”:不与他人共有。“呕吐”:吐出。“不再吸回”:这是依所说的相反方式而说,意思是吐出的不再吃回去。以此说明所吐出的成为善吐。“三无间双”中也是同样的道理。“分散”:散开、解脱,意思是不系缚。“不分散”:不散开、不解脱。“分散”“不分散”作短音读诵是优美的。“熏灭”:使之熄灭。“不熏起”:不燃烧。“超越世间而安住”:一切出世间法都正确超越世间、战胜世间而安住,所以是出世间。以这一切如上所说的方式,说明了出世间法相对于世间的超越性和殊胜性。
Vippamuttāti alittattameva nānābyañjanena visesitaṃ. Ye keci hi yattha yena vā alittā, te tattha tena vā vippamuttā honti. Lokā vippamuttātiādīni tīṇi nissakkavasena vuttāni. Visaññuttāti vippamuttattavisesanaṃ. Ye keci hi yattha yena yato vippamuttā, te tattha tena tato visaññuttā nāma honti. Lokā sujjhantīti lokamalaṃ dhovitvā lokā sujjhanti. Visujjhantīti tadeva upasaggena visesitaṃ. Vuṭṭhahantīti uṭṭhitā honti. Vivaṭṭantīti nivaṭṭanti. Na sajjantīti na lagganti. Na gayhantīti na gaṇhīyanti. Na bajjhantīti na bādhīyanti. Samucchindantīti appavattiṃ karonti. Yathā ca lokaṃ samucchinnattāti, tatheva ‘‘lokā visuddhattā’’tiādi vuttameva hoti. Paṭippassambhentīti nirodhenti. Apathātiādīni cattāri sabbesupi lokuttaresu yujjanti. Apathāti amaggā. Agatīti appatiṭṭhā. Avisayāti anāyattā. Asādhāraṇāti asamānā. Vamantīti uggilanti. Na paccāvamantīti vuttapaṭipakkhanayena vuttaṃ, vantaṃ puna na adantīti attho. Etena vantassa suvantabhāvo vutto hoti. Anantaradukattayepi eseva nayo. Visīnentīti vikiranti vimuccanti, na bandhantīti attho. Na ussīnentīti na vikiranti na vimuccanti. ‘‘Visinentī’’ti ‘‘na ussinentī’’ti rassaṃ katvā pāṭho sundaro. Vidhūpentīti nibbāpenti. Nasaṃdhūpentīti na ujjalanti. Lokaṃ samatikkamma abhibhuyya tiṭṭhantīti sabbepi lokuttarā dhammā lokaṃ sammā atikkamitvā abhibhavitvā ca tiṭṭhantīti lokuttarā. Sabbehipi imehi yathāvuttehi pakārehi lokuttarānaṃ lokato uttarabhāvo adhikabhāvo ca vutto hotīti.
4444. 现在,在出世间论之后,紧接着对以经典为开端的力论——也就是《出世间论》品中所说的力论——中尚未解释过的义理进行注解。在这里,先按照经典的方式显示五种力,为了进一步显示其他诸力,便说“还有六十八种力”等开头的话。所有这些力,都是因为不被各自的对立面所动摇,所以称为力。在“惭力”等词中:因为对恶感到羞耻,所以叫惭,这是羞耻的名称。因为对恶感到畏惧,所以叫愧,这是对恶的怖畏的名称。惭由内心生起,愧由外缘生起。惭以自己为主导,愧以世间为主导。惭安住于羞耻的本性,愧安住于畏惧的本性。惭的特征是具足敬重,愧的特征是怖畏罪过、见到怖畏之相。正是这惭,不被无惭所动摇,所以是惭力。正是这愧,不被无愧所动摇,所以是愧力。不被不审察所动摇,所以是审察力,这是审察慧的名称。以精进为首修习七觉支时,所生起的力量是修习力,这是对如此生起的四种蕴的称呼。清净的戒等是无过力。四摄事是摄力。也有读作“在摄受中有力”的。对苦和轻蔑的忍受是忍力。通过说法使他人欢喜,是教示力。使所修习的义理得以证得,是信解力。在诸善法中多修多行,是自在力。在诸善法中随自己所好而安立,是决意力。惭力等这些词的含义,是依据论母各处的文句,特别取与之相应的意思来说的。止力和观力,就是已经达到力用阶段的止和观本身。
44. Idāni lokuttarakathāya anantaraṃ kathitāya lokuttarakathāvatiyā suttantapubbaṅgamāya balakathāya apubbatthānuvaṇṇanā. Tattha ādito suttantavasena pañca balāni dassetvā tadaññānipi balāni dassetukāmo apica aṭṭhasaṭṭhi balānītiādimāha. Sabbānipi taṃtaṃpaṭipakkhehi akampiyaṭṭhena balāni nāma honti. Hiribalantiādīsu pāpato hirīyanti etāyāti hirī, lajjāyetaṃ nāmaṃ. Pāpato ottappanti etenāti ottappaṃ, pāpato ubbegassetaṃ nāmaṃ. Ajjhattasamuṭṭhānā hirī, bahiddhāsamuṭṭhānaṃ ottappaṃ. Attādhipati hirī, lokādhipati ottappaṃ . Lajjāsabhāvasaṇṭhitā hirī, bhayasabhāvasaṇṭhitaṃ ottappaṃ. Sappatissavalakkhaṇā hirī, vajjabhīrukabhayadassāvilakkhaṇaṃ ottappaṃ. Sā eva hirī ahirikena na kampatīti hiribalaṃ. Tadeva ottappaṃ anottappena na kampatīti ottappabalaṃ. Appaṭisaṅkhānena na kampatīti paṭisaṅkhānabalaṃ. Upaparikkhaṇapaññāyetaṃ nāmaṃ. Vīriyasīsena satta bojjhaṅge bhāventassa uppannabalaṃ bhāvanābalaṃ. Tathāpavattānaṃ catunnaṃ khandhānametaṃ nāmaṃ. Parisuddhāni sīlādīni anavajjabalaṃ. Cattāri saṅgahavatthūni saṅgahabalaṃ. Saṅgahe balantipi pāṭho. Dukkhamānaṃ adhivāsanaṃ khantibalaṃ. Dhammakathāya paresaṃ tosanaṃ paññattibalaṃ. Adhitassa atthassa adhigamāpanaṃ nijjhattibalaṃ. Kusalesu bahubhāvo issariyabalaṃ. Kusalesu yathāruci patiṭṭhānaṃ adhiṭṭhānabalaṃ. Hiribalādīnaṃ attho mātikāpadesu byañjanavasena visesato yujjamānaṃ gahetvā vutto. Samathabalaṃ vipassanābalanti balappattā samathavipassanā eva.
在论母的释义中,先说“于无信而不动摇,故为信力”,这是点明了根本的力义,然后再以其余九种方式对此根本义加以分别详示。因为,某一法达到不动摇、具足力用的状态时,便能支撑俱生法,制伏对立的烦恼,净化作为通达之开端的戒与见,令心安住于所缘,令心明净,令心得自在并证得殊胜;由此更向上而证得更高的通达,次第证得圣道而现观诸谛,于证果时安立于灭。因此,以九种方式分别了力义。这一解说方式,也适用于精进力等其余四力。
Mātikāniddese assaddhiye na kampatīti saddhābalanti mūlabalaṭṭhaṃ vatvā tameva aparehi navahi pariyāyehi visesetvā dassesi. Yo hi dhammo akampiyo balappatto hoti, so sahajāte upatthambheti, attano paṭipakkhe kilese pariyādiyati, paṭivedhassa ādibhūtaṃ sīlaṃ diṭṭhiñca visodheti, cittaṃ ārammaṇe patiṭṭhāpeti, cittaṃ pabhassaraṃ karonto vodāpeti, vasiṃ pāpento visesaṃ adhigamāpeti, tato uttariṃ pāpento uttaripaṭivedhaṃ kāreti, kamena ariyamaggaṃ pāpetvā saccābhisamayaṃ kāreti, phalappattiyā nirodhe patiṭṭhāpeti. Tasmā navadhā balaṭṭho visesito. Esa nayo vīriyabalādīsu catūsu.
对欲贪感到羞惭:与出离相应的修行者,是以出离而对欲贪感到羞惭。对愧也是如此。通过这两者,其实已经说明了对一切不善法生起惭与愧。对嗔等词的含义,也应当依照同样的方式来理解。已审察:是依不痴,从过患的角度去审查。修习:就是增长。应舍:指贪等过失。摄受:就是系缚。堪忍:就是那位修行者能接受、觉得合意。施设:就是令欢喜。决择:就是令思惟。运用自在:就是成为心的主宰之后,令心随自己的意愿运转。决意:就是确立。修习力等一切,也都是指出离等本身。虽然在论母的注释中是以另一种方式说的,但应当知道,这里不再解说,是因为其含义已由字词本身显明。详细说明了止力与观力之后,在结尾处说伴有掉举的烦恼和蕴不能动摇它等,以及伴有无明的烦恼和蕴不能动摇它等,这是为了显示止力与观力的特征。
Kāmacchandaṃ hirīyatīti nekkhammayutto yogī nekkhammena kāmacchandato hirīyati. Ottappepi eseva nayo. Etehi sabbākusalehipi hirīyanā ottappanā vuttāyeva honti. Byāpādantiādīnampi imināva nayena attho veditabbo. Paṭisaṅkhātīti asammohavasena ādīnavato upaparikkhati. Bhāvetīti vaḍḍheti. Vajjanti rāgādivajjaṃ. Saṅgaṇhātīti bandhati. Khamatīti tassa yogissa khamati ruccati. Paññāpetīti toseti. Nijjhāpetīti cintāpeti. Vasaṃ vattetīti citte pahu hutvā cittaṃ attano vasaṃ katvā pavatteti. Adhiṭṭhātīti vidahati. Bhāvanābalādīni sabbānipi nekkhammādīniyeva. Mātikāvaṇṇanāya aññathā vutto, attho pana byañjanavaseneva pākaṭattā idha na vuttoti veditabbaṃ. Samathabalaṃ vipassanābalañca vitthārato niddisitvā avasāne uddhaccasahagatakilese ca khandhe ca na kampatītiādi ca avijjāsahagatakilese ca khandhe ca na kampatītiādi ca samathabalavipassanābalānaṃ lakkhaṇadassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ.
在有学力和无学力中,“修学正见,所以是有学力”的意思是:有学的人修学正见,所以叫有学;那正见就是这位有学者的力,所以叫有学力。其中,“因为已经修学完毕,所以是无学力”的意思是:无学的人对正见已经修学完毕,不再修学了,所以叫无学;那正见本身就是这位无学者的力,所以叫无学力。对正思惟等,也是同样的道理。“正智”指省察智。这个智即使是世间的,因为在有学身上生起,所以说是有学力;因为在无学身上生起,所以说是无学力。“正解脱”指除了八支圣道之外,其余与果相应之法。不过有些人说:“除了出世间解脱之外,其余一切解脱都是正解脱。”它作为有学力和无学力的道理,和前面所说的一样。
Sekhāsekhabalesu sammādiṭṭhiṃ sikkhatīti sekhabalanti sekhapuggalo sammādiṭṭhiṃ sikkhatīti sekho, sā sammādiṭṭhi tassa sekhassa balanti sekhabalanti attho. Tattha sikkhitattā asekhabalanti asekhapuggalo tattha sammādiṭṭhiyā sikkhitattā na sikkhatīti asekho, sāyeva sammādiṭṭhi tassa asekhassa balanti asekhabalaṃ. Eseva nayo sammāsaṅkappādīsu. Sammāñāṇanti paccavekkhaṇañāṇaṃ. Tampi hi lokikampi hontaṃ sekhassa pavattattā sekhabalaṃ, asekhassa pavattattā asekhabalanti vuttaṃ. Sammāvimuttīti aṭṭha maggaṅgāni ṭhapetvā sesā phalasampayuttā dhammā . Keci pana ‘‘ṭhapetvā lokuttaravimuttiṃ avasesā vimuttiyo sammāvimuttī’’ti vadanti. Tassa sekhāsekhabalattaṃ vuttanayameva.
在漏尽者的诸力当中,这一切也都属于智之力。经文里说“漏尽比丘的”,这是表示行为者的属格,意思是“由那位漏尽比丘”。“无常故”是指以生起之后又坏灭的方式,观见为无常。“如实”是指依照事物本来的样子。“以慧”是指与观相应的道慧。因为善见了无常,以这为根本,也就善见了苦和无我。“以此”是表态中性词,或者意思是“由于什么原因”。“依于”就是缘于。“宣说”就是承认、宣称。“火坑喻”是因为有极大热恼,所以用火坑来比喻。“爱欲”是指所依之欲和烦恼欲两者。
Khīṇāsavabalesu sabbānipi ñāṇabalāni. Khīṇāsavassa bhikkhunoti karaṇatthe sāmivacanaṃ, khīṇāsavena bhikkhunāti attho. Aniccatoti hutvā abhāvākārena aniccato. Yathābhūtanti yathāsabhāvato. Paññāyāti sahavipassanāya maggapaññāya. Aniccato sudiṭṭhā dukkhato anattato sudiṭṭhā honti tammūlakattā. Yanti bhāvanapuṃsakavacanaṃ, yena kāraṇenāti vā attho. Āgammāti paṭicca. Paṭijānātīti sampaṭicchati paṭiññaṃ karoti. Aṅgārakāsūpamāti mahābhitāpaṭṭhena aṅgārakāsuyā upamitā. Kāmāti vatthukāmā ca kilesakāmā ca.
趣向远离:以果等至的力量,倾向于被称为依远离的涅槃。确实有三种远离:身远离、心远离、依远离。身远离属于身居远离之处、乐于出离的人。心远离属于致力于增上心的人。依远离属于无依著的人、已到达诸行灭尽的人,或者是指倾向于被称为出离远离的涅槃。确实有五种远离:镇伏远离、彼分远离、正断远离、止息远离、出离远离。趣向远离,就是倾向于远离。倾向远离,就是朝向远离。偏向远离,就是以远离为首要方向。后两个词和前一个词是同义词。住于远离,就是远离烦恼,或者已远离。乐于出离,就是乐于涅槃,或者乐于出家。已消尽,就是已完全消尽,即使一部分也不执著、已解脱、已脱离。一切,就是一切方式。顺漏法,就是与漏相应,作为漏之因的烦恼法,这是意思。或者,已消尽,就是已离欲,无贪,这是意思。从何?从一切顺漏法,从一切三地法,这是意思。在此,以十种漏尽者之力,讲述了漏尽者的世间与出世间之道。他们说:“一切行无常”,是苦遍知之力;“诸欲如炭火”,是集断之力;“心倾向于远离”,是灭作证之力;“四念处”等,是七种道修习之力。十种神变之力将在神变论中显现。
Vivekaninnanti phalasamāpattivasena upadhivivekasaṅkhātanibbānaninnaṃ. Tayo hi vivekā – kāyaviveko cittaviveko upadhivivekoti. Kāyaviveko ca vivekaṭṭhakāyānaṃ nekkhammābhiratānaṃ. Cittaviveko ca adhicittamanuyuttānaṃ. Upadhiviveko ca nirupadhīnaṃ puggalānaṃ visaṅkhāragatānaṃ, nissaraṇavivekasaṅkhātanibbānaninnaṃ vā. Pañca hi vivekā – vikkhambhanaviveko tadaṅgaviveko samucchedaviveko paṭippassaddhiviveko nissaraṇavivekoti. Vivekaninnanti viveke ninnaṃ. Vivekapoṇanti viveke nataṃ. Vivekapabbhāranti vivekasīsabhāraṃ. Dvepi purimasseva vevacanāni. Vivekaṭṭhanti kilesehi vajjitaṃ, dūrībhūtaṃ vā. Nekkhammābhiratanti nibbāne abhirataṃ, pabbajjāya abhirataṃ vā. Byantībhūtanti vigatantībhūtaṃ, ekadesenāpi anallīnaṃ vippamuttaṃ visaṃsaṭṭhaṃ. Sabbasoti sabbathā. Āsavaṭṭhāniyehi dhammehīti saṃyogavasena āsavānaṃ kāraṇabhūtehi kilesadhammehīti attho. Atha vā byantībhūtanti vigatanikantibhūtaṃ, nittaṇhanti attho. Kuto? Sabbaso āsavaṭṭhāniyehi dhammehi sabbehi tebhūmakadhammehīti attho. Idha dasahi khīṇāsavabalehi khīṇāsavassa lokiyalokuttaro maggo kathito. ‘‘Aniccato sabbe saṅkhārā’’ti dukkhapariññābalaṃ, ‘‘aṅgārakāsūpamā kāmā’’ti samudayapahānabalaṃ, ‘‘vivekaninnaṃ cittaṃ hotī’’ti nirodhasacchikiriyābalaṃ, ‘‘cattāro satipaṭṭhānā’’tiādi sattavidhaṃ maggabhāvanābalantipi vadanti. Dasa iddhibalāni iddhikathāya āvi bhavissanti.
在解说如来力时,所谓“如来力”,是指那些不与其他人共有、只属于如来的力。或者说,就像过去诸佛的力是依靠福德积习的圆满而成就的那样,这样成就的力也叫如来力,这是另一种含义。其中,如来力有两种:身力和智力。在这两者当中,身力应当依照象族来理解。古代的大德确实这样说过:
Tathāgatabalaniddese tathāgatabalānīti aññehi asādhāraṇāni tathāgatasseva balāni. Yathā vā pubbabuddhānaṃ balāni puññussayasampattiyā āgatāni, tathā āgatabalānītipi attho. Tattha duvidhaṃ tathāgatabalaṃ – kāyabalaṃ ñāṇabalañca. Tesu kāyabalaṃ hatthikulānusārena veditabbaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ porāṇehi –
黑象、恒河象、白象、红褐象、黄褐象;
香象、吉祥象、金象、布萨象、六牙象,一共十种。
‘‘Kāḷāvakañca gaṅgeyyaṃ, paṇḍaraṃ tambapiṅgalaṃ; Gandhamaṅgalahemañca, uposathachaddantime dasā’’ti. (vibha. aṭṭha. 760; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.148; saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 2.2.22);
这就是十种象族。其中,“黑象”要理解为普通的象族。十个男人的体力,等于一头黑象的力气。十头黑象的力气,等于一头恒河象的力气。十头恒河象的力气,等于一头白象的力气。十头白象的力气,等于一头红褐象的力气。十头红褐象的力气,等于一头黄褐象的力气。十头黄褐象的力气,等于一头香象的力气。十头香象的力气,等于一头吉祥象的力气。十头吉祥象的力气,等于一头金象的力气。十头金象的力气,等于一头布萨象的力气。十头布萨象的力气,等于一头六牙象的力气。十头六牙象的力气,等于一位如来的身力。这个力也叫那罗延坚固力。按普通象的数量来算,这个力等于百亿头象的力气;按人数来算,等于千亿个男人的力气。以上这就是如来的身力。
Imāni dasa hatthikulāni. Tattha kāḷāvakanti pakatihatthikulaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Yaṃ dasannaṃ purisānaṃ kāyabalaṃ, taṃ ekassa kāḷāvakassa hatthino balaṃ. Yaṃ dasannaṃ kāḷāvakānaṃ balaṃ, taṃ ekassa gaṅgeyyassa balaṃ. Yaṃ dasannaṃ gaṅgeyyānaṃ, taṃ ekassa paṇḍarassa. Yaṃ dasannaṃ paṇḍarānaṃ , taṃ ekassa tambassa. Yaṃ dasannaṃ tambānaṃ, taṃ ekassa piṅgalassa. Yaṃ dasannaṃ piṅgalānaṃ, taṃ ekassa gandhahatthino. Yaṃ dasannaṃ gandhahatthīnaṃ, taṃ ekassa maṅgalahatthino. Yaṃ dasannaṃ maṅgalahatthīnaṃ, taṃ ekassa hemavatassa. Yaṃ dasannaṃ hemavatānaṃ, taṃ ekassa uposathassa. Yaṃ dasannaṃ uposathānaṃ, taṃ ekassa chaddantassa. Yaṃ dasannaṃ chaddantānaṃ, taṃ ekassa tathāgatassa balaṃ. Nārāyanasaṅghātabalantipi idameva vuccati. Tadetaṃ pakatihatthino gaṇanāya hatthīnaṃ koṭisahassassa, purisagaṇanāya dasannaṃ purisakoṭisahassānaṃ balaṃ hoti. Idaṃ tāva tathāgatassa kāyabalaṃ.
智慧力在这里以及其他经典中,指的就是十力智;《中部》里说的四无畏智、在八种大众中不动摇的智、辨别四生的智、辨别五趣的智,以及《相应部》里说的七十三种智、七十七种智等等,还有无数其他种类的智。这些就叫智慧力。这里所指的也正是智慧力。因为智具有不可动摇和能支撑的作用,所以称为力。
Ñāṇabalaṃ pana idha tāva aññattha ca pāḷiyaṃ āgatameva dasabalañāṇaṃ, majjhime (ma. ni. 1.150) āgataṃ catuvesārajjañāṇaṃ, aṭṭhasu parisāsu akampanañāṇaṃ, catuyoniparicchedakañāṇaṃ, pañcagatiparicchedakañāṇaṃ, saṃyuttake (saṃ. ni. 2.33-34) āgatāni tesattati ñāṇāni, sattasattati ñāṇānīti evamaññānipi anekāni ñāṇasahassāni. Etaṃ ñāṇabalaṃ nāma. Idhāpi ñāṇabalameva adhippetaṃ. Ñāṇañhi akampiyaṭṭhena upatthambhanaṭṭhena ca balanti vuttaṃ.
「处与非处」是指从因和因的角度来了知。因为果依那个因而安住,依它而存在、生起和持续,所以那个因被称为「处」。世尊如实了知:哪些法对哪些法的生起是因、是缘,那就是那些法的「处」;哪些法对哪些法的生起不是因、不是缘,那就是那些法的「非处」。他这样如实了知处就是处、非处就是非处。「以彼智」是指以那个智。「此」是指这个处非处智,对如来来说,这就叫作如来的一种力。其余各句的衔接也应这样理解。
Ṭhānañca ṭhānatoti kāraṇañca kāraṇato. Kāraṇañhi yasmā tattha phalaṃ tiṭṭhati tadāyattavuttitāya uppajjati ceva pavattati ca, tasmā ṭhānanti vuccati. Taṃ bhagavā ye ye dhammā yesaṃ yesaṃ dhammānaṃ hetū paccayā uppādāya, taṃ taṃ ṭhānanti, ye ye dhammā yesaṃ yesaṃ dhammānaṃ na hetū na paccayā uppādāya, taṃ taṃ aṭṭhānanti pajānanto ṭhānañca ṭhānato aṭṭhānañca aṭṭhānato yathābhūtaṃ pajānāti. Yampīti yena ñāṇena. Idampīti idampi ṭhānāṭṭhānañāṇaṃ, tathāgatassa tathāgatabalaṃ nāma hotīti attho. Evaṃ sesapadesupi yojanā veditabbā.
所谓“牛王位”,就是最殊胜的处所、最上的处所;或者,“牛王”指过去诸佛,意思是诸佛的地位。再者,一百头牛中的首领叫usabha,一千头牛中的首领叫vasabha。或者说,一百群牛中的首领叫usabha,一千群牛中的首领叫vasabha。而在一切牛中最为殊胜、能承受一切危难、通体白色、端严可爱、能背负沉重负担、即使听到上百道雷声也不惊恐的牛王,叫nisabha。这里所指的就是usabha,这也是nisabha的同义词。属于usabha的,就叫āsabha。“位”是指用四只脚压踩大地而站立。此(位)因如同āsabha(牛王)而称āsabha:就像那头叫nisabha的牛王,具足牛王之力,用四只脚压踩大地,以不动的姿态站立;同样,如来也具足十种如来之力,以四无畏为脚,压踩八众的大地,在包括天神的世间里,不被任何敌人或对手动摇,以不动的姿态站立。当他这样站立时,便宣称、趋入、不否认地把那个牛王位担在自己身上。因此说——“他宣称牛王位”。
Āsabhaṃṭhānanti seṭṭhaṭṭhānaṃ uttamaṭṭhānaṃ, āsabhā vā pubbabuddhā, tesaṃ ṭhānanti attho. Apica gavasatajeṭṭhako usabho, gavasahassajeṭṭhako vasabho, vajasatajeṭṭhako vā usabho, vajasahassajeṭṭhako vasabho, sabbagavaseṭṭho sabbaparissayasaho seto pāsādiko mahābhāravaho asanisatasaddehipi asantasanīyo nisabho, so idha usabhoti adhippeto. Idampi hi tassa pariyāyavacanaṃ. Usabhassa idanti āsabhaṃ. Ṭhānanti catūhi pādehi pathaviṃ uppīḷetvā avaṭṭhānaṃ. Idaṃ pana āsabhaṃ viyāti āsabhaṃ yatheva hi nisabhasaṅkhāto usabho usabhabalena samannāgato catūhi pādehi pathaviṃ uppīḷetvā acalaṭṭhānena tiṭṭhati, evaṃ tathāgatopi dasahi tathāgatabalehi samannāgato catūhi vesārajjapādehi aṭṭhaparisapathaviṃ uppīḷetvā sadevake loke kenaci paccatthikena paccāmittena akampiyo acalaṭṭhānena tiṭṭhati, evaṃ tiṭṭhamāno ca taṃ āsabhaṃ ṭhānaṃ paṭijānāti upagacchati na paccakkhāti, attani āropeti. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘āsabhaṃ ṭhānaṃ paṭijānātī’’ti (saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 2.2.22; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.148).
在八种大众中:按刹帝利、婆罗门、居士、沙门,以及四大王天、三十三天、魔、梵天来分,就是这八种大众。作狮子吼:意思是发出最殊胜的吼声、毫无畏惧的吼声,或者发出像狮子吼一样的声音。这个含义要依据《狮子吼经》来说明。又像狮子因为能忍受、能摧破,所以被称为狮子;同样,如来因为能忍受世间法、能摧破外道的说法,所以被称为狮子。这样所说的狮子发出的吼声,就是狮子吼。其中,就像狮子具足狮子的力量,在任何地方都无所畏惧、毫毛不竖,发出狮子吼;同样,如来狮子也具足如来的力量,在八种大众中无所畏惧、毫毛不竖,以“这是色……”这样的方式,发出具足种种教说庄严的狮子吼。因此说——“在众中作狮子吼”。
Parisāsūti khattiyabrāhmaṇagahapatisamaṇacātumahārājikatāvatiṃsamārabrahmānaṃ vasena aṭṭhasu parisāsu. Sīhanādaṃ nadatīti seṭṭhanādaṃ achambhitanādaṃ nadati, sīhanādasadisaṃ vā nādaṃ nadati. Ayamattho sīhanādasuttena (ma. ni. 1.146 ādayo; dī. ni. 1.381 ādayo) dīpetabbo. Yathā vā sīho sahanato hananato ca sīhoti vuccati, evaṃ tathāgato lokadhammānaṃ sahanato parappavādānaṃ hananato sīhoti vuccati. Evaṃ vuttassa sīhassa nādaṃ sīhanādaṃ. Tattha yathā sīho sīhabalena samannāgato sabbattha visārado vigatalomahaṃso sīhanādaṃ nadati, evaṃ tathāgatasīhopi tathāgatabalehi samannāgato aṭṭhasu parisāsu visārado vigatalomahaṃso ‘‘iti rūpa’’ntiādinā (saṃ. ni. 3.78) nayena nānāvidhadesanāvilāsasampannaṃ sīhanādaṃ nadati. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘parisāsu sīhanādaṃ nadatī’’ti.
转梵轮:这里的“梵”是指最殊胜、最上、清净。而“轮”这个词——
Brahmacakkaṃ pavattetīti ettha brahmanti seṭṭhaṃ uttamaṃ visuddhaṃ. Cakkasaddo panāyaṃ –
在成就、相、车轮、威仪中;
在布施、宝、法、胸中,以及在轮等事物中,它都能见到;
在这里,它指的是法轮,而这个也要从两方面来说明。
Sampattiyaṃ lakkhaṇe ca, rathaṅge iriyāpathe; Dāne ratanadhammūra, cakkādīsu ca dissati; Dhammacakke idha mato, tampi dvedhā vibhāvaye.
在“比丘们,有这四种轮,具足这些轮的天与人……”(《增支部》4.31)等经文里,这个“轮”是在“成就”的意思上出现的。在“足底生有轮相……”(《长部》2.35)里,是在“相”的意思上。在“如车轮随运载者的脚”(《法句经》1)里,是在“车轮”的意思上。在“四轮、九门……”(《相应部》1.29)里,是在“威仪”的意思上。在“布施吧,享用吧,不要放逸,乔萨罗王,转动轮吧”(《本生经》1.7.149)里,是在“布施”的意思上。在“天界的宝轮出现了……”(《长部》2.243)里,是在“宝轮”的意思上。在“我所转动的轮……”(《经集》562)里,是在“法轮”的意思上。在“被欲望击中的人,轮在头顶旋转”(《本生经》1.1.104;1.5.103)里,是在“胸轮”的意思上。在“即使以刀刃为边缘的轮……”(《长部》1.166)里,是在“打击用的轮”的意思上。在“霹雳轮”(《长部》3.61;《相应部》2.162)里,是在“霹雳圈”的意思上。而在这里,这个词指的是法轮。
‘‘Cattārimāni , bhikkhave, cakkāni, yehi samannāgatānaṃ devamanussāna’’ntiādīsu (a. ni. 4.31) hi ayaṃ sampattiyaṃ dissati. ‘‘Heṭṭhā pādatalesu cakkāni jātāni hontī’’ti (dī. ni. 2.35) ettha lakkhaṇe. ‘‘Cakkaṃva vahato pada’’nti (dha. pa. 1) ettha rathaṅge. ‘‘Catucakkaṃ navadvāra’’nti (saṃ. ni. 1.29) ettha iriyāpathe. ‘‘Dadaṃ bhuñja mā ca pamādo , cakkaṃ vattaya kosalādhipā’’ti (jā. 1.7.149) ettha dāne. ‘‘Dibbaṃ cakkaratanaṃ pāturahosī’’ti (dī. ni. 2.243) ettha ratanacakke. ‘‘Mayā pavattitaṃ cakka’’nti (su. ni. 562) ettha dhammacakke. ‘‘Icchāhatassa posassa, cakkaṃ bhamati matthake’’ti (jā. 1.1.104; 1.5.103) ettha uracakke. ‘‘Khurapariyantena cepi cakkenā’’ti (dī. ni. 1.166) ettha paharaṇacakke. ‘‘Asanivicakka’’nti (dī. ni. 3.61; saṃ. ni. 2.162) ettha asanimaṇḍale. Idha panāyaṃ dhammacakke mato.
这个法轮有两种:证悟智和教说智。其中,由智慧培育、能给自己带来圣果的是证悟智;由悲心培育、能给弟子们带来圣果的是教说智。证悟智又分两种:正在生起和已经生起。从出家一直到阿拉汉道,这叫正在生起;在证果的那一刻,这叫已经生起。或者,从兜率天一直到在菩提树下证得阿拉汉道,这叫正在生起;在证果的那一刻,这叫已经生起。或者,从燃灯佛的十力开始一直到阿拉汉道,这叫正在生起;在证果的那一刻,这叫已经生起。教说智也分两种:正在转动和已经转动。一直到阿若憍陈如长老证得阿拉汉道,这叫正在转动;在他证果的那一刻,这叫已经转动。其中,证悟智是出世间的,教说智是世间的。这两种智都不与其他人共有,只有佛陀才能生起。因此说——转梵轮。
Taṃ panetaṃ dhammacakkaṃ duvidhaṃ hoti paṭivedhañāṇañca desanāñāṇañca. Tattha paññāpabhāvitaṃ attano ariyaphalāvahaṃ paṭivedhañāṇaṃ, karuṇāpabhāvitaṃ sāvakānaṃ ariyaphalāvahaṃ desanāñāṇaṃ. Tattha paṭivedhañāṇaṃ uppajjamānaṃ uppannanti duvidhaṃ. Tañhi abhinikkhamanato yāva arahattamaggā uppajjamānaṃ nāma, phalakkhaṇe uppannaṃ nāma. Tusitabhavanato vā yāva bodhipallaṅke arahattamaggā uppajjamānaṃ nāma, phalakkhaṇe uppannaṃ nāma. Dīpaṅkaradasabalato vā paṭṭhāya yāva arahattamaggā uppajjamānaṃ nāma, phalakkhaṇe uppannaṃ nāma. Desanāñāṇampi pavattamānaṃ pavattanti duvidhaṃ. Tañhi yāva aññātakoṇḍaññattherassa arahattamaggā pavattamānaṃ nāma, phalakkhaṇe pavattaṃ nāma. Tattha paṭivedhañāṇaṃ lokuttaraṃ, desanāñāṇaṃ lokiyaṃ. Ubhayampi panetaṃ aññehi asādhāraṇaṃ, buddhānaṃyeva orasañāṇaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘brahmacakkaṃ pavattetī’’ti.
“业造作”是指已经受持并造下的善业或不善业,或者业本身就是业造作。“依处与因”是指从缘和因这两个角度来看。其中,趣向、所依、时间、加行是果报的依处;业则是因。
Kammasamādānānanti samādiyitvā katānaṃ kusalākusalakammānaṃ, kammameva vā kammasamādānaṃ. Ṭhānaso hetusoti paccayato ceva hetuto ca. Tattha gatiupadhikālapayogā vipākassa ṭhānaṃ. Kammaṃ hetu.
“遍行”是指既通往一切趣向、也不通往任何趣向。“行道”就是道路。“如实了知”是说:即使有许多人正在杀同一个众生,他也能知道这个人的思将导向地狱,那个人的思将导向畜生趣。就像这样,在同一个对象上,对于被称为善思、不善思的种种行道,他能不颠倒地了知它们的真实本性。
Sabbatthagāmininti sabbagatigāminiñca agatigāminiñca. Paṭipadanti maggaṃ. Yathābhūtaṃ pajānātīti bahūsupi manussesu ekameva pāṇaṃ ghātentesu imassa cetanā nirayagāminī bhavissati, imassa tiracchānayonigāminīti iminā nayena ekavatthusmimpi kusalākusalacetanāsaṅkhātānaṃ paṭipattīnaṃ aviparītato sabhāvaṃ jānāti.
“有多种界”是指由眼界等界,或者由欲界等界而形成的多种界。“种种界”是指这些界各自性质不同,所以是种种不同种类的界。“世间”是指蕴世间、处世间、界世间。“如实了知”是指对每一种界都无颠倒地彻见其真实本质。
Anekadhātunti cakkhudhātuādīhi, kāmadhātuādīhi vā dhātūhi bahudhātuṃ. Nānādhātunti tāsaṃyeva dhātūnaṃ vilakkhaṇattā nānappakāradhātuṃ . Lokanti khandhāyatanadhātulokaṃ. Yathābhūtaṃ pajānātīti tāsaṃ tāsaṃ dhātūnaṃ aviparītato sabhāvaṃ paṭivijjhati.
种种意乐:因为有意乐低劣、殊胜等种种不同,所以就有种种不同的意乐状态。
Nānādhimuttikatanti hīnapaṇītādiadhimuttīhi nānādhimuttikabhāvaṃ.
“其他有情”是指精进的有情。“其他人”是指比他们更下劣的其他有情。或者,这两个词其实是同一个意思,只是世尊为了适应所度化的对象,才分两种方式来说。这里也是按照世尊所说的方式来解释。“根之上下”是指信等诸根的殊胜与低劣,也就是它们的增长与减退。
Parasattānanti padhānasattānaṃ. Parapuggalānanti tato paresaṃ hīnasattānaṃ. Ekatthameva vā etaṃ padadvayaṃ veneyyavasena bhagavatā dvedhā vuttaṃ. Idhāpi bhagavatā vuttanayeneva vuttaṃ. Indriyaparopariyattanti saddhādīnaṃ indriyānaṃ parabhāvañca aparabhāvañca, vuddhiñca hāniñcāti attho.
禅那、解脱、定、等至:指初禅等四种禅那,以有色的形式见外色等八种解脱(《无碍解道》1.209),有寻有伺等三种定,以及初禅等至等九种渐次等至。杂染:指导致退失的法。清净:指导致殊胜增进的法。出起:指从禅那等中出离的那个原因。不过,这个出起按照“清净也是出起,从各个定出起也是出起”(《分别论》828)的说法,指的是熟练的禅那以及有分和果等至。因为较低的熟练禅那是较高的禅那的近因,所以说“清净也是出起”。而通过有分,可以从一切禅那中出起;从灭尽等至则通过果等至出起。针对这一点,所以说“从各个定出起也是出起”。
Jhānavimokkhasamādhisamāpattīnanti paṭhamādīnaṃ catunnaṃ jhānānaṃ, ‘‘rūpī rūpāni passatī’’tiādīnaṃ (paṭi. ma. 1.209) aṭṭhannaṃ vimokkhānaṃ, savitakkasavicārādīnaṃ tiṇṇaṃ samādhīnaṃ, paṭhamajjhānasamāpattiādīnañca navannaṃ anupubbasamāpattīnaṃ. Saṃkilesanti hānabhāgiyadhammaṃ. Vodānanti visesabhāgiyadhammaṃ. Vuṭṭhānanti yena kāraṇena jhānādīhi vuṭṭhahanti, taṃ kāraṇaṃ. Taṃ pana ‘‘vodānampi vuṭṭhānaṃ, tamhā tamhā samādhimhā vuṭṭhānampi vuṭṭhāna’’nti (vibha. 828) evaṃ vuttaṃ paguṇajjhānañceva bhavaṅgaphalasamāpattiyo ca. Heṭṭhimaṃ heṭṭhimañhi paguṇajjhānaṃ uparimassa uparimassa padaṭṭhānaṃ hoti, tasmā ‘‘vodānampi vuṭṭhāna’’nti vuttaṃ. Bhavaṅgena pana sabbajjhānehi vuṭṭhānaṃ hoti, nirodhasamāpattito phalasamāpattiyā vuṭṭhānaṃ hoti. Taṃ sandhāya ‘‘tamhā tamhā samādhimhā vuṭṭhānampi vuṭṭhāna’’nti vuttaṃ.
宿住智、天眼智、漏尽智这三种智,前面已经说明过了。
Pubbenivāsadibbacakkhuāsavakkhayañāṇāni heṭṭhā pakāsitāneva.
在这里,“依漏尽”是指通过阿罗汉道彻底断尽一切烦恼。“无漏”是指远离了诸漏。“心解脱与慧解脱”:这里用“心”来指与阿罗汉果相应的定,用“慧”来指与那个定相应的慧。应当这样理解:定因为远离了贪,所以叫心解脱;慧因为远离了无明,所以叫慧解脱。世尊确实这样说过:“比丘们,他那份定就是他的定根;比丘们,他那份慧就是他的慧根。比丘们,就是这样,由于离贪而有心解脱,由于离无明而有慧解脱。”(《相应部》5.516; 520)此外,这里还应当知道,止的力量是心解脱,观的力量是慧解脱。“于现法”是指在当前这个生命体中。“自己以证智作证”是指以殊胜的智慧亲自现前证知,不依赖他人而了知。“具足”是指已经证得、已经完成。这十种力智的详细说明,应当按照《阿毗达摩》(《分别论》809等)所说的方法来了知。
Tattha āsavānaṃ khayāti arahattamaggena sabbakilesānaṃ khayā. Anāsavanti āsavavirahitaṃ. Cetovimuttiṃ paññāvimuttinti ettha cetovacanena arahattaphalasampayutto samādhi, paññāvacanena taṃsampayuttā ca paññā vuttā. Tattha ca samādhi rāgato vimuttattā cetovimutti, paññā avijjāya vimuttattā paññāvimuttīti veditabbā. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā – ‘‘yo hissa, bhikkhave, samādhi, tadassa samādhindriyaṃ. Yā hissa, bhikkhave, paññā, tadassa paññindriyaṃ. Iti kho, bhikkhave, rāgavirāgā cetovimutti avijjāvirāgā paññāvimuttī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.516; 520). Apicettha samathabalaṃ cetovimutti, vipassanābalaṃ paññāvimuttīti veditabbaṃ. Diṭṭheva dhammeti imasmiṃyeva attabhāve. Sayaṃ abhiññā sacchikatvāti adhikāya paññāya attanāyeva paccakkhaṃ katvā, aparappaccayena ñatvāti attho. Upasampajjāti adhigantvā, nipphādetvā vā. Imesaṃ pana dasannaṃ dasabalañāṇānaṃ vitthāro abhidhamme (vibha. 809 ādayo) vuttanayena veditabbo.
在这里,有其他派别的人提出这样的说法:所谓十力智,并不是一种单独的智,它只是全知智的一种分类而已。但不应该这样看。因为十力智是一种智,全知智是另一种智。十力智只了知各自对应的作用,而全知智既了知那些,也了知那些之外的其他一切。在十力智当中,第一智只了知因与非因,第二智只了知业与异熟的各种差别,第三智只了知业的限定,第四智只了知诸界差别的原因,第五智只了知有情的意乐与胜解,第六智只了知诸根的锐利与迟钝,第七智只了知与禅那等相关的那些有情的杂染等情况,第八智只了知过去曾住的诸蕴相续,第九智只了知有情的死与结生,第十智只了知对诸谛的限定。而全知智则既了知这些所应了知的,也了知比这些更超胜的。但它并不执行所有这些智的全部作用。因为全知智即使作为禅那,也不能令心进入安止;作为神通,也不能变现种种变化;作为道,也不能断尽烦恼。
Tattha paravādikathā hoti – dasabalañāṇaṃ nāma pāṭiyekkaṃ ñāṇaṃ natthi, sabbaññutaññāṇassevāyaṃ pabhedoti. Na taṃ tathā daṭṭhabbaṃ. Aññameva hi dasabalañāṇaṃ, aññaṃ sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ. Dasabalañāṇañhi sakasakakiccameva jānāti, sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ tampi, tato avasesampi jānāti. Dasabalañāṇesu hi paṭhamaṃ kāraṇākāraṇameva jānāti, dutiyaṃ kammantaravipākantarameva, tatiyaṃ kammaparicchedameva, catutthaṃ dhātunānattakāraṇameva, pañcamaṃ sattānaṃ ajjhāsayādhimuttimeva, chaṭṭhaṃ indriyānaṃ tikkhamudubhāvameva, sattamaṃ jhānādīhi saddhiṃ tesaṃ saṃkilesādimeva, aṭṭhamaṃ pubbenivutthakhandhasantatimeva, navamaṃ sattānaṃ cutipaṭisandhimeva, dasamaṃ saccaparicchedameva. Sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ pana etehi jānitabbañca, tato uttariñca pajānāti. Etesaṃ pana kiccaṃ na sabbaṃ karoti. Tañhi jhānaṃ hutvā appetuṃ na sakkoti, iddhi hutvā vikubbituṃ na sakkoti, maggo hutvā kilese khepetuṃ na sakkoti.
另外,应该这样反问那位外道论师:这个所谓的十力智,到底是有寻有伺、无寻唯伺,还是无寻无伺?是属于欲界、色界、无色界,还是世间、出世间?如果他真的知道,就会说:按顺序,前七种智是有寻有伺的。接着会说:后面两种是无寻无伺的。还会说:漏尽智可能是有寻有伺,可能是无寻唯伺,也可能是无寻无伺。同样,他还会说:按顺序,前七种是欲界所摄,后面两种是色界所摄,最后一种是出世间。他还会说:而全知智则只是有寻有伺的,只是欲界所摄,只是世间的。
Apica paravādī evaṃ pucchitabbo ‘‘dasabalañāṇaṃ nāmetaṃ savitakkasavicāraṃ avitakkavicāramattaṃ avitakkāvicāraṃ kāmāvacaraṃ rūpāvacaraṃ arūpāvacaraṃ lokiyaṃ lokuttara’’nti. Jānanto ‘‘paṭipāṭiyā satta ñāṇāni savitakkasavicārānī’’ti vakkhati. ‘‘Tato parāni dve avitakkaavicārānī’’ti vakkhati. ‘‘Āsavakkhayañāṇaṃ siyā savitakkasavicāraṃ, siyā avitakkavicāramattaṃ, siyā avitakkaavicāra’’nti vakkhati. Tathā ‘‘paṭipāṭiyā satta kāmāvacarāni, tato parāni dve rūpāvacarāni, tato avasāne ekaṃ lokuttara’’nti vakkhati. ‘‘Sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ pana savitakkasavicārameva kāmāvacarameva lokiyamevā’’ti vakkhati.
明白了这里对“未曾有过的解释”的说明之后,现在要知道:如来首先以处非处智,看见应受调伏的众生有没有烦恼障——也就是能不能证得漏尽、不能证得漏尽的处与非处。这是从看见世间正见的立足处,以及看见决定邪见没有立足处而知道的。然后,以业报智看见他们有没有报障,这是从看见三因结生而知道的。以一切处行道智看见他们有没有业障,这是从看见他们没有无间业而知道的。这样,对于没有障碍的人,为了随顺说法,以种种界智看见他们行为上的差别,这是从看见界的种种差别而知道的。接着,以种种意乐智看见他们的意乐,即使他们还没有开始努力修行,也能随顺他们的意乐而说法。这样看见意乐之后,为了按照他们各自的能力和力量说法,以根上下智看见他们根器的上下差别,这是从看见信等诸根的锐利与迟钝而知道的。即使这样完全了知了根器的上下差别,如果他们还在很远的地方,就以禅那等智——因为在禅那等法上已经得到自在——以神通力特别快速地接近他们。接近之后,以宿住随念智为他们显示过去生的情形,再以凭借天眼威神力才能得到的他心智看见他们当前心的殊胜状态,最后以漏尽智的威神之力,由于对通向漏尽的道路已经没有迷惑,就为他们说法,使他们证得漏尽。因此,应当知道:就是按照这个次第,才说了这十种力。
Evamettha apubbatthānuvaṇṇanaṃ ñatvā idāni yasmā tathāgato paṭhamaṃyeva ṭhānāṭṭhānañāṇena veneyyasattānaṃ āsavakkhayādhigamassa ceva anadhigamassa ca ṭhānāṭṭhānabhūtaṃ kilesāvaraṇābhāvaṃ passati lokiyasammādiṭṭhiṭṭhānadassanato niyatamicchādiṭṭhiṭṭhānābhāvadassanato ca. Atha nesaṃ kammavipākañāṇena vipākāvaraṇābhāvaṃ passati tihetukapaṭisandhidassanato. Sabbatthagāminipaṭipadāñāṇena kammāvaraṇābhāvaṃ passati ānantarikakammābhāvadassanato. Evaṃ anāvaraṇānaṃ anekadhātunānādhātuñāṇena anukūladhammadesanatthaṃ cariyāvisesaṃ passati dhātuvemattadassanato. Atha nesaṃ nānādhimuttikatāñāṇena adhimuttiṃ passati payogaṃ anādiyitvāpi adhimuttivasena dhammadesanatthaṃ . Athevaṃ diṭṭhaadhimuttīnaṃ yathāsatti yathābalaṃ dhammaṃ desetuṃ indriyaparopariyattañāṇena indriyaparopariyattaṃ passati saddhādīnaṃ tikkhamudubhāvadassanato. Evaṃ pariññātindriyaparopariyattāpi panete sace dūre honti, atha jhānādiñāṇena jhānādīsu vasībhūtattā iddhivisesena khippaṃ upagacchati. Upagantvā ca nesaṃ pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇena pubbajātivibhāvanaṃ dibbacakkhānubhāvato pattabbena cetopariyañāṇena sampati cittavisesaṃ passanto āsavakkhayañāṇānubhāvena āsavakkhayagāminiyā paṭipadāya vigatasammohattā āsavakkhayāya dhammaṃ deseti. Tasmā iminānukkamena imāni dasa balāni vuttānīti veditabbānīti.
4545. 现在,为了从特相上说明一切力,他以“依什么意义是信力”等方式提问,又以“于不信之事不可动摇的意义”等方式作答。其中,“知惭”等是以人为立足点的开示。在修习力等直到决意力的诸力中,应知“于彼处”“由彼”“彼”都是指出离等而言。由彼定而心得统一,意思是:依靠那定,心成为专一。于彼处生起,意思是在那里以寂止的相应而生起,或者以那为观照对象而生起。于彼处学,意思是在那有学力中,有学之人正在修学,所“于彼处由已学”:于彼无学力中,无学因已学毕,故称无学力。“由彼智而诸漏尽”:由彼世间与出世间的智慧令诸漏断尽,因此彼智即是漏尽者之力。“彼成就”神通力:在成就神通的人那里,神通得以成就,因此神通本身就是力,称为神通力。以无量义:因为声闻只以一部分了知处非处等,所以是就一切行相了知而说“如实了知”。虽然在三明中没有说“如实了知”,但在其他地方说过的缘故,所以在三明中也可说已说。在其他地方:在其余七智力和阿毗达摩中,以及在十力中。然而,了知根上下之智是一切声闻所不共的。因此,十力也是声闻所不共的。以增上义、以无比义,故为无量,正因如此,才说“以无量义为如来力”。
45. Idāni sabbabalāni lakkhaṇato niddisitukāmo kenaṭṭhena saddhābalantiādinā nayena pucchaṃ katvā assaddhiye akampiyaṭṭhenātiādinā nayena vissajjanaṃ akāsi. Tattha hirīyatītiādi puggalādhiṭṭhānā desanā. Bhāvanābalādīsu adhiṭṭhānabalapariyantesu ‘‘tatthā’’ti ca, ‘‘tenā’’ti ca, ‘‘ta’’nti ca nekkhammādikameva sandhāya vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Tena cittaṃ ekagganti tena samādhinā cittaṃ ekaggaṃ hotīti vuttaṃ hoti. Tattha jāteti tattha samathe sampayogavasena jāte, tasmiṃ vā vipassanārammaṇaṃ hutvā jāte. Tattha sikkhatīti tattha sekhabale sekho sikkhatīti sekhabalanti attho. Tattha sikkhitattāti tattha asekhabale asekhassa sikkhitattā asekhabalaṃ. Tena āsavā khīṇāti tena lokiyalokuttarena ñāṇena āsavā khīṇāti taṃ ñāṇaṃ khīṇāsavabalaṃ . Lokiyenāpi hi ñāṇena āsavā khīṇā nāma vipassanāya abhāve lokuttaramaggābhāvato. Evaṃ khīṇāsavassa balanti khīṇāsavabalaṃ. Tassa ijjhatīti iddhibalanti tassa iddhimato ijjhatīti iddhiyeva balaṃ iddhibalaṃ. Appameyyaṭṭhenāti yasmā sāvakā ṭhānāṭṭhānādīni ekadesena jānanti, sabbākārena pajānanaṃyeva sandhāya ‘‘yathābhūtaṃ pajānātī’’ti vuttaṃ. Kiñcāpi tīsu vijjāsu ‘‘yathābhūtaṃ pajānātī’’ti na vuttaṃ, aññattha pana vuttattā tāsupi vuttameva hoti. Aññatthāti sesesu sattasu ñāṇabalesu ca abhidhamme (vibha. 760) ca dasasupi balesu. Indriyaparopariyattañāṇaṃ pana sabbathāpi sāvakehi asādhāraṇameva. Tasmā dasapi balāni sāvakehi asādhāraṇānīti. Adhimattaṭṭhena atuliyaṭṭhena appameyyāni, tasmāyeva ca ‘‘appameyyaṭṭhena tathāgatabala’’nti vuttanti.
10. 关于空的讨论
10. Suññakathā
46现在,在讲完以出世间力收尾的“力论”之后,紧接着要讲解以经藏为先导、以出世间空收尾的“空论”,这是对前面没有讲过的义理加以解释。
在经文中,先说“atha”这个词,它是用来承接话语的虚词。通过它,就把后面“具寿”等话承接起来了。“kho”是用来补足句子的虚词。
“yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami”这句里,“yena”是具格当作处格来用。所以这里的含义应当理解为:世尊在哪里,就往哪里去亲近。或者也可以这样理解:世尊因为某种原因而应当被人天亲近,那位长老就是基于同样的原因前去亲近。那么,世尊为什么应当被亲近呢?就像鸟儿们为了享用甘美的果实,会飞向那棵常年结果的大树一样,天人们为了获得种种殊胜的功德,就是基于这个原因去亲近世尊。这里的“近赴”就是“去”的意思。“近赴已”则是说明亲近这个动作已经完成。或者也可以理解为:这样去了之后,又从那里走到更靠近世尊的地方。
46. Idāni lokuttarabalapariyosānāya balakathāya anantaraṃ kathitāya lokuttarasuññatāpariyosānāya suttantapubbaṅgamāya suññatākathāya apubbatthānuvaṇṇanā. Suttante tāva athāti vacanopādāne nipāto. Etena āyasmātiādivacanassa upādānaṃ kataṃ hoti. Khoti padapūraṇatthe nipāto. Yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamīti bhummatthe karaṇavacanaṃ. Tasmā yattha bhagavā, tattha upasaṅkamīti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Yena vā kāraṇena bhagavā devamanussehi upasaṅkamitabbo, teneva kāraṇena upasaṅkamīti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Kena ca kāraṇena bhagavā upasaṅkamitabbo? Nānappakāraguṇavisesādhigamādhippāyena, sāduphalūpabhogādhippāyena dijagaṇehi niccaphalitamahārukkho viya, tena kāraṇena upasaṅkamīti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Upasaṅkamīti ca gatoti vuttaṃ hoti. Upasaṅkamitvāti upasaṅkamanapariyosānadīpanaṃ. Atha vā evañca gato tato āsannataraṃ ṭhānaṃ bhagavato samīpasaṅkhātaṃ gantvātipi vuttaṃ hoti.
礼敬之后,就是以五体投地的方式顶礼。现在,他想询问自己究竟是以什么意义而来到世间最上者跟前侍奉,于是把十指并拢、光洁明亮的合掌举到头顶,然后坐在一边。所谓“一边”,是中性词的说明方式,就像“日月运行不规则”等说法那样。因此,应当这样理解这里的含义:他坐下的样子,就是坐在一边。或者,这里是处格的意义上用宾格来表达。所谓“坐下”,就是安坐。因为聪明的人和天人来到值得尊敬的人面前时,懂得座位的分寸,都会坐在一边,而这位长老正是他们当中的一位,所以就坐在一边。
Abhivādetvāti pañcapatiṭṭhitena vanditvā. Idāni yenaṭṭhena loke aggapuggalassa upaṭṭhānaṃ āgato, taṃ pucchitukāmo dasanakhasamodhānasamujjalaṃ añjaliṃ sirasi patiṭṭhapetvā ekamantaṃ nisīdi. Ekamantanti ca bhāvanapuṃsakaniddeso ‘‘visamaṃ candimasūriyā pariharantī’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 4.70) viya. Tasmā yathā nisinno ekamantaṃ nisinno hoti, tathā nisīdīti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Bhummatthe vā etaṃ upayogavacanaṃ. Nisīdīti nisajjaṃ kappesi. Paṇḍitā hi devamanussā garuṭṭhānīyaṃ upasaṅkamitvā āsanakusalatāya ekamantaṃ nisīdanti, ayañca thero tesaṃ aññataro, tasmā ekamantaṃ nisīdi.
那么,怎样才算“坐在一边”呢?就是避开六种坐姿上的毛病。这六种是:坐得太远、坐得太近、坐在上风处、坐在高处、坐得太正对、坐得太靠后。坐得太远的话,如果想说话,就得大声说;坐得太近,就会碰到对方;坐在上风处,身上的气味会熏到对方;坐在高处,显得不恭敬;坐得太正对,如果想看对方,就得眼睛对着眼睛看;坐得太靠后,如果想看对方,就得把脖子伸长了看。所以这位长老也是避开了这六种坐姿上的毛病才坐下的。因此经文说“坐在一边”。“这样说”的意思就是:说了这些话。
Kathaṃ nisinno pana ekamantaṃ nisinno hotīti? Cha nisajjadose vajjetvā. Seyyathidaṃ – atidūraṃ accāsannaṃ uparivātaṃ unnatappadesaṃ atisammukhaṃ atipacchāti. Atidūre nisinno hi sace kathetukāmo hoti, uccāsaddena kathetabbaṃ hoti. Accāsanne nisinno saṅghaṭṭanaṃ karoti. Uparivāte nisinno sarīragandhena bādhati. Unnatappadese nisinno agāravaṃ pakāseti. Atisammukhā nisinno sace daṭṭhukāmo hoti, cakkhunā cakkhuṃ āhacca daṭṭhabbaṃ hoti. Atipacchā nisinno sace daṭṭhukāmo hoti, gīvaṃ pasāretvā daṭṭhabbaṃ hoti. Tasmā ayampi ete cha nisajjadose vajjetvā nisīdi. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘ekamantaṃ nisīdī’’ti. Etadavocāti etaṃ avoca.
“空世间,空世间”,尊者,人们这样说。这句话的意思是:在这个教法里,那些依教奉行的比丘们到处都在说“空世间,空世间”。因为各处这样的说法很多,为了把他们的所有这些话都统摄进来,就用了重复的说法。这样一说,所有那些话就都被包含在内了。“以何为量”,就是以什么为量度。“nu”这个词是表达疑问的语气词。以我或我所来说为空,就是空于世间所设想的那种“造作者、感受者、自在主宰者”的我,正因为我之不存在,也就空于属于我的资具。眼等一切世间法的集合,因为具有坏灭的性质,所以称为世间。而在这个世间里,既没有我,也没有我所,所以说为空世间。出世间法虽然也空于我和我所,但为了配合提问的语境,这里只说了世间法。而且,说“空”并不是说这个法不存在,而是说在这个法里,没有我和我所那种坚实的存在。就像世间说“空房子、空瓶子”时,并不是说房子和瓶子不存在,而是说在那个房子或瓶子里,没有别的东西存在。世尊也说过:“凡是在那里不存在的东西,就依此观它为空的;而那里还剩余存在的,就如实知道‘这是存在的’。”说的正是这个意思。在《智论》和《声论》里,也是这个意思。所以,在这部经里,说的就是无我相。
Suñño loko suñño lokoti, bhante, vuccatīti imasmiṃ sāsane paṭipannehi tehi tehi bhikkhūhi ‘‘suñño loko suñño loko’’ti kathīyatīti attho. Tahiṃ tahiṃ tādisānaṃ vacanānaṃ bahukattā tesaṃ sabbesaṃ saṅgaṇhanatthaṃ āmeḍitavacanaṃ kataṃ. Evañhi vutte sabbāni tāni vacanāni saṅgahitāni honti. Kittāvatāti kittakena parimāṇena. Nu-iti saṃsayatthe nipāto. Suññaṃ attena vā attaniyena vāti ‘‘kārako vedako sayaṃvasī’’ti evaṃ lokaparikappitena attanā ca attābhāvatoyeva attano santakena parikkhārena ca suññaṃ. Sabbaṃ cakkhādi lokiyaṃ dhammajātaṃ, taṃyeva lujjanapalujjanaṭṭhena loko nāma. Yasmā ca attā ca ettha natthi, attaniyañca ettha natthi, tasmā suñño lokoti vuccatīti attho. Lokuttaropi ca dhammo attattaniyehi suñño eva, pucchānurūpena pana lokiyova dhammo vutto. Suññoti ca dhammo natthīti vuttaṃ na hoti, tasmiṃ dhamme attattaniyasārassa natthibhāvo vutto hoti. Loke ca ‘‘suññaṃ gharaṃ, suñño ghaṭo’’ti vutte gharassa ghaṭassa ca natthibhāvo vutto na hoti, tasmiṃ ghare ghaṭe ca aññassa natthibhāvo vutto hoti. Bhagavatā ca ‘‘iti yañhi kho tattha na hoti, tena taṃ suññaṃ samanupassati. Yaṃ pana tattha avasiṭṭhaṃ hoti, taṃ santaṃ idamatthīti pajānātī’’ti ayameva attho vutto. Tathā ñāyaganthe ca saddaganthe ca ayameva attho. Iti imasmiṃ suttante anattalakkhaṇameva kathitaṃ.
47在经分别里,先列出“空空”等二十五条论母,再按“空”的关联逐一解释。其中,就论母来说,“空空”是指被称为空的那个空本身,不是用别的修饰词限定出来的空。这里因为并没有指明是哪一个空,或者只是着眼于空性本身,所以用了中性词。其余的也这样理解。“行空”是说行本身相对于其他行来说是空的。“变易空”是说由于衰老和坏灭而有变坏、变易,因为这种变易而空。“最上空”是说它最殊胜,并且相对于我、我所,或者相对于一切行来说,是空的。“相空”是说相本身相对于其他相来说是空的。“镇伏空”是通过出离等暂时压伏而空。在“彼分空”等四种里,也是同样的道理。“内空”是说内在的它,相对于我、我所等来说是空的。“外空”是说外在的它,相对于我、我所等来说是空的。“双空”是说内外两者相对于我、我所等来说是空的。“同分空”是说它有共同的部分,这同分本身相对于我、我所等来说是空的,意思是“相似空”。“异分空”是说它没有共同的部分,这异分本身相对于我、我所等来说是空的,意思是“不相似空”。有些版本把同分空、异分空写在出离空之后。“寻求空”是说以出离等法来说,它相对于欲贪等来说是空的。在“执取空”等三种里,也是同样的道理。“一性空”是因为安住在单一所缘上,没有种种所缘的散乱,所以一性本身相对于多样性来说是空的。“异性空”则相反,是说多样性本身相对于一性来说是空的。“堪忍空”是说以出离等法来说,它相对于欲贪等来说是空的。在“决意空”和“遍入空”里,也是同样的道理。也有写成“遍入空”的版本。“正知者”是指具备正知、正在般涅槃的阿罗汉。“已尽生起”是指无取著般涅槃。“一切空性”是指一切空智。“究竟空”是因为一切行都不存在,所以是究竟意义上的空。
47. Suttantaniddese suññasuññantiādīni pañcavīsati mātikāpadāni suññasambandhena uddisitvā tesaṃ niddeso kato. Tattha mātikāya tāva suññasaṅkhātaṃ suññaṃ, na aññena upapadena visesitanti suññasuññaṃ. Asukanti aniddiṭṭhattā cettha suññattameva vā apekkhitvā napuṃsakavacanaṃ kataṃ. Evaṃ sesesupi. Saṅkhāroyeva sesasaṅkhārehi suññoti saṅkhārasuññaṃ. Jarābhaṅgavasena virūpo pariṇāmo vipariṇāmo, tena vipariṇāmena suññaṃ vipariṇāmasuññaṃ. Aggañca taṃ attattaniyehi, sabbasaṅkhārehi vā suññañcāti aggasuññaṃ. Lakkhaṇameva sesalakkhaṇehi suññanti lakkhaṇasuññaṃ. Nekkhammādinā vikkhambhanena suññaṃ. Vikkhambhanasuññaṃ. Tadaṅgasuññādīsupi catūsu eseva nayo. Ajjhattañca taṃ attattaniyādīhi suññañcāti ajjhattasuññaṃ. Bahiddhā ca taṃ attattaniyādīhi suññañcāti bahiddhāsuññaṃ. Tadubhayaṃ attattaniyādīhi suññanti dubhatosuññaṃ. Samāno bhāgo etassāti sabhāgaṃ, sabhāgañca taṃ attattaniyādīhi suññañcāti sabhāgasuññaṃ, sadisasuññanti attho. Vigataṃ sabhāgaṃ visabhāgaṃ, visabhāgañca taṃ attattaniyādīhi suññañcāti visabhāgasuññaṃ, visadisasuññanti attho. Kesuci potthakesu sabhāgasuññaṃ visabhāgasuññaṃ nissaraṇasuññānantaraṃ likhitaṃ. Nekkhammādiesanā kāmacchandādinā suññāti esanāsuññaṃ. Pariggahasuññādīsu tīsupi eseva nayo. Ekārammaṇe patiṭṭhitattā nānārammaṇavikkhepābhāvato ekattañca taṃ nānattena suññañcāti ekattasuññaṃ. Tabbiparītena nānattañca taṃ ekattena suññañcāti nānattasuññaṃ. Nekkhammādikhanti kāmacchandādinā suññāti khantisuññaṃ. Adhiṭṭhānasuññe pariyogāhanasuññe ca eseva nayo. Pariyogahanasuññantipi pāṭho. Sampajānassāti sampajaññena samannāgatassa parinibbāyantassa arahato. Pavattapariyādānanti anupādāparinibbānaṃ. Sabbasuññatānanti sabbasuññānaṃ. Paramatthasuññanti sabbasaṅkhārābhāvato uttamatthabhūtaṃ suññaṃ.
48在论母的解释中,“以常为空”是说:因为没有任何东西能越过坏灭而一直存在,所以没有什么是常的,因此以常为空。“以恒为空”是说:即使在它存在的时候,也是依靠各种条件才得以维持,所以没有任何坚固的东西,因此以恒为空。“以永恒为空”是说:没有任何东西能永不中断地在一切时中存在,因此以永恒为空。“以不变易法为空”是说:没有任何东西的本性能不因衰老和坏灭而改变,因此以不变易法为空。虽然在经中只说了无我空,但为了在这里也显示常空和乐空,所以也说了“以常”等语句。因为,凡是无常的,由于被逼迫性所逼迫,就是苦;所以当说了常空时,也就等于说了乐空。在这里应当知道,被简略说的有:色等六种境、眼识等六种识、眼触等六种触、眼触所生受等六种受。
48. Mātikāniddese niccena vāti bhaṅgaṃ atikkamitvā pavattamānassa kassaci niccassa abhāvato niccena ca suññaṃ. Dhuvena vāti vijjamānakālepi paccayāyattavuttitāya thirassa kassaci abhāvato dhuvena ca suññaṃ. Sassatena vāti abbocchinnassa sabbakāle vijjamānassa kassaci abhāvato sassatena ca suññaṃ. Avipariṇāmadhammena vāti jarābhaṅgavasena avipariṇāmapakatikassa kassaci abhāvato avipariṇāmadhammena ca suññaṃ. Suttante attasuññatāya eva vuttāyapi niccasuññatañca sukhasuññatañca dassetuṃ idha niccena vātiādīnipi vuttāni. Aniccasseva hi pīḷāyogena dukkhattā niccasuññatāya vuttāya sukhasuññatāpi vuttāva hoti. Rūpādayo panettha cha visayā, cakkhuviññāṇādīni cha viññāṇāni, cakkhusamphassādayo cha phassā, cakkhusamphassajā vedanādayo cha vedanā cha saṅkhittāti veditabbaṃ.
在“福行”等词中:它能净化造作者,圆满他的意愿,又能产生值得受人供养的福乐生存,所以叫“福”;它造作异熟果和业所生色,所以叫“行”。福之行就是福行。与福相对立的是非福,非福之行就是非福行。“不动”就是不动摇,它造作不动的生存,所以叫不动行。福行包括由布施、持戒、修习所引生的八种欲界善思,以及只由修习所引生的五种色界善思,一共是十三种思。非福行是由杀生等行为所引生的十二种不善思。不动行是只由修习所引生的四种无色界善思。这三种行合起来,一共是二十九种思。在“身行”等词中:从身而转起的,或者说是身之行,就叫身行。“语行”和“心行”也是同样的道理。这个三分法,是为了显示在造业积聚的那一刹那,福行等是怎样通过不同门径而转起的。具体来说:先引生身表,然后从身门转起的八种欲界善思、十二种不善思以及神通思,这二十一种思就叫“身行”;同样这些思先引生语表,然后从语门转起,就叫“语行”;而从意门转起的一切,也就是全部二十九种思,就叫“心行”。在“过去诸行”等词中:一切有为法到了自己的刹那就灭去了,这是过去诸行;还没有到达自己的刹那,这是未来诸行;已经到达自己的刹那,这是现在诸行。
Puññābhisaṅkhārotiādīsu punāti attano kārakaṃ, pūreti cassa ajjhāsayaṃ, pujjañca bhavaṃ nibbattetīti puññaṃ, abhisaṅkharoti vipākaṃ kaṭattārūpañcāti abhisaṅkhāro, puññaṃ abhisaṅkhāro puññābhisaṅkhāro. Puññapaṭipakkhato apuññaṃ abhisaṅkhāro apuññābhisaṅkhāro. Na iñjaṃ aneñjaṃ, aneñjaṃ bhavaṃ abhisaṅkharotīti āneñjābhisaṅkhāro. Puññābhisaṅkhāro dānasīlabhāvanāvasena pavattā aṭṭha kāmāvacarakusalacetanā, bhāvanāvaseneva pavattā pañca rūpāvacarakusalacetanāti terasa cetanā honti, apuññābhisaṅkhāro pāṇātipātādivasena pavattā dvādasa akusalacetanā, āneñjābhisaṅkhāro bhāvanāvaseneva pavattā catasso arūpāvacaracetanāti tayopi saṅkhārā ekūnatiṃsa cetanā honti. Kāyasaṅkhārotiādīsu kāyato vā pavatto, kāyassa vā saṅkhāroti kāyasaṅkhāro. Vacīsaṅkhāracittasaṅkhāresupi eseva nayo. Ayaṃ tiko kammāyūhanakkhaṇe puññābhisaṅkhārādīnaṃ dvārato pavattidassanatthaṃ vutto. Kāyaviññattiṃ samuṭṭhāpetvā hi kāyadvārato pavattā aṭṭha kāmāvacarakusalacetanā, dvādasa akusalacetanā, abhiññācetanā cāti ekavīsati cetanā kāyasaṅkhāro nāma, tā eva ca vacīviññattiṃ samuṭṭhāpetvā vacīdvārato pavattā vacīsaṅkhāro nāma, manodvāre pavattā pana sabbāpi ekūnatiṃsa cetanā cittasaṅkhāro nāma. Atītā saṅkhārātiādīsu sabbepi saṅkhatadhammā sakakkhaṇaṃ patvā niruddhā atītā saṅkhārā, sakakkhaṇaṃ appattā anāgatā saṅkhārā, sakakkhaṇaṃ pattā paccuppannā saṅkhārāti.
先说明“变易空”之后,为了说明“现在法”容易用“快乐”来解说它的变易,所以首先显示了现在法。其中,“已生的色”就是现在色。“以自性空”这里,“自性”就是“自己的存在”,意思是“自己本身生起”。或者,“自性”是“实有的存在”,意思也是“从自体生起”。因为法是依缘而转起的,没有缘就没有自己本身的存在,也没有从自体的存在,所以说“以自性空”,意思是空于自己本身的存在,或空于从自体的存在。或者,“自性”就是“自己的存在”。因为在地界等许多色法、非色法中,每一法依待其他法而称为“自己的”。而“存在”是法的同义词。并且,一法的其他名为“存在”的法不存在,所以空于自己的其他存在,意思是自己的空于其他存在。以此说了一法的单一自性。或者,“以自性空”就是空于空的自性。说了什么?就是以空空性而空,不是以其他同义词空性而空。
Vipariṇāmasuññe paccuppannaṃ dassetvā tassa tassa vipariṇāmo sukhena vattuṃ sakkāti paṭhamaṃ paccuppannadhammā dassitā. Tattha jātaṃ rūpanti paccuppannaṃ rūpaṃ. Sabhāvena suññanti ettha sayaṃ bhāvo sabhāvo, sayameva uppādoti attho. Sato vā bhāvo sabhāvo, attatoyeva uppādoti attho. Paccayāyattavuttittā paccayaṃ vinā sayameva bhāvo, attato eva vā bhāvo etasmiṃ natthīti sabhāvena suññaṃ, sayameva bhāvena, attato eva vā bhāvena suññanti vuttaṃ hoti. Atha vā sakassa bhāvo sabhāvo. Pathavīdhātuādīsu hi anekesu rūpārūpadhammesu ekeko dhammo paraṃ upādāya sako nāma. Bhāvoti ca dhammapariyāyavacanametaṃ. Ekassa ca dhammassa añño bhāvasaṅkhāto dhammo natthi, tasmā sakassa aññena bhāvena suññaṃ, sako aññena bhāvena suññoti attho. Tena ekassa dhammassa ekasabhāvatā vuttā hoti. Atha vā sabhāvena suññanti suññasabhāveneva suññaṃ. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? Suññasuññatāya eva suññaṃ, na aññāhi pariyāyasuññatāhi suññanti vuttaṃ hoti.
如果有人这样说:“自己的存在就是自性,以那个自性来说是空的。”这话是什么意思呢?“存在”就是法,它相对于其他法,被“自己的”这个词限定之后,就叫作自性。由于任何法都不存在,所以说“已生的色以自性为空”,就是在说色不存在。这样一来,就和“已生的色”这个说法相矛盾了。因为,没有生起的东西不能叫作“已生的”。涅槃确实没有生起,它不叫“已生的”;生、老、死也没有生起,它们也不叫“已生的”。正因为如此,这里并没有采用“已生的生以自性为空,已生的老死以自性为空”这样的说法,而是只以“有”作为终点来宣说。如果对没有生起的东西也能用“已生的”这个词,那就应该说“已生的生,已生的老死”。然而,对于没有生起的生和老死,并没有用“已生的”这个词,所以“以自性为空、不存在”这个说法——因为不存在的东西没有生起——就和“已生的”这个词相矛盾。而且,对不存在的东西说“空”,既和前面所说的世间说法相矛盾,也和世尊的教说相矛盾,还和正理、词典的说法相矛盾,并以许多道理相违背,所以那种说法应当像垃圾一样丢掉。世尊说:“诸比丘,世间智者认为有的,我也说它有。世间智者认为没有的,我也说它没有。诸比丘,什么是世间智者认为有、我也说它有的呢?诸比丘,色是无常的、苦的、会变坏的,这是世间智者认为有的,我也说它有。”通过许多这样的佛语证据和许多道理,应当得出结论:诸法在各自当下确实是存在的。
Sace pana keci vadeyyuṃ ‘‘sako bhāvo sabhāvo, tena sabhāvena suñña’’nti. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? Bhāvoti dhammo, so paraṃ upādāya sapadena visesito sabhāvo nāma hoti. Dhammassa kassaci avijjamānattā ‘‘jātaṃ rūpaṃ sabhāvena suñña’’nti rūpassa avijjamānatā vuttā hotīti. Evaṃ sati ‘‘jātaṃ rūpa’’ntivacanena virujjhati. Na hi uppādarahitaṃ jātaṃ nāma hoti. Nibbānañhi uppādarahitaṃ, taṃ jātaṃ nāma na hoti, jātijarāmaraṇāni ca uppādarahitāni jātāni nāma na honti. Tenevettha ‘‘jātā jāti sabhāvena suññā , jātaṃ jarāmaraṇaṃ sabhāvena suñña’’nti evaṃ anuddharitvā bhavameva avasānaṃ katvā niddiṭṭhaṃ. Yadi uppādarahitassāpi ‘‘jāta’’ntivacanaṃ yujjeyya, ‘‘jātā jāti, jātaṃ jarāmaraṇa’’nti vattabbaṃ bhaveyya. Yasmā uppādarahitesu jātijarāmaraṇesu ‘‘jāta’’ntivacanaṃ na vuttaṃ, tasmā ‘‘sabhāvena suññaṃ avijjamāna’’nti vacanaṃ avijjamānassa uppādarahitattā ‘‘jāta’’ntivacanena virujjhati. Avijjamānassa ca ‘‘suñña’’ntivacanaṃ heṭṭhā vuttena lokavacanena ca bhagavato vacanena ca ñāyasaddaganthavacanena ca virujjhati, anekāhi ca yuttīhi virujjhati, tasmā taṃ vacanaṃ kacavaramiva chaḍḍitabbaṃ. ‘‘Yaṃ, bhikkhave, atthisammataṃ loke paṇḍitānaṃ, ahampi taṃ atthīti vadāmi. Yaṃ, bhikkhave, natthisammataṃ loke paṇḍitānaṃ, ahampi taṃ natthīti vadāmi. Kiñca, bhikkhave, atthisammataṃ loke paṇḍitānaṃ, yamahaṃ atthīti vadāmi? Rūpaṃ, bhikkhave, aniccaṃ dukkhaṃ vipariṇāmadhammaṃ atthisammataṃ loke paṇḍitānaṃ, ahampi taṃ atthīti vadāmī’’tiādīhi (saṃ. ni. 3.94) anekehi buddhavacanappamāṇehi anekāhi ca yuttīhi dhammā sakakkhaṇe vijjamānā evāti niṭṭhamettha gantabbaṃ.
已经消失的色,是指生起之后走到坏灭、已经灭去的过去色。既是变易的,又是空的:因为老与坏灭而变成变异,所以叫变易;而只有现在法才有变易存在,过去法没有变易,因此以那种变易来说它是空的,这就是这里的含义。在已生的受等说法里,道理也一样。但生与老死并不是完成法,不能以自性而获得,所以在这里不适用,因此舍弃了已生的生、已生的老死这两种讲法,只以有等讲法作为终点而确立。
Vigataṃ rūpanti uppajjitvā bhaṅgaṃ patvā niruddhaṃ atītaṃ rūpaṃ. Vipariṇatañceva suññañcāti jarābhaṅgavasena virūpaṃ pariṇāmaṃ pattañca vattamānasseva vipariṇāmasabbhāvato atītassa vipariṇāmābhāvato tena vipariṇāmena suññañcāti attho. Jātā vedanātiādīsupi eseva nayo. Jātijarāmaraṇaṃ pana anipphannattā sakabhāvena anupalabbhanīyato idha na yujjati, tasmā ‘‘jātā jāti, jātaṃ jarāmaraṇa’’ntiādike dve naye pahāya bhavādikameva nayaṃ pariyosānaṃ katvā ṭhapitaṃ.
“最上”是指在最高处。“最胜”是极其值得称赞。“殊胜”是极为超越。也有写成“viseṭṭha”的读法。这三种都是对涅槃的赞叹。涅槃因为要依正行道去实践,所以称为“处”。“此”就是指这个。现在要说的涅槃,就是用“此”来指出来。因为依靠涅槃,一切行才得以止息,蕴依、烦恼依、行依、爱乐功德依这些依著才得以舍离,渴爱才得以尽、离贪、灭,所以说涅槃是“一切行的止息、一切依的舍离、渴爱的尽、离贪、灭”。以“涅槃”这个词,就归结到了它的自性相上。
Agganti agge bhavaṃ. Seṭṭhanti ativiya pasaṃsanīyaṃ. Visiṭṭhanti atisayabhūtaṃ. Viseṭṭhantipi pāṭho. Tidhāpi pasatthaṃ nibbānaṃ sammāpaṭipadāya paṭipajjitabbato padaṃ nāma. Yadidanti yaṃ idaṃ. Idāni vattabbaṃ nibbānaṃ nidasseti. Yasmā nibbānaṃ āgamma sabbasaṅkhārānaṃ samatho hoti, khandhūpadhikilesūpadhiabhisaṅkhārūpadhikāmaguṇūpadhisaṅkhātānaṃ upadhīnaṃ paṭinissaggo hoti, taṇhānaṃ khayo virāgo nirodho ca hoti, tasmā sabbasaṅkhārasamatho sabbūpadhipaṭinissaggotaṇhakkhayo virāgo nirodhoti vuccati. Nibbānanti sabhāvalakkhaṇena nigamitaṃ.
关于诸相,经中这样说:“比丘们,愚人有三种愚人的相、愚人的标志、愚人的特征。哪三种呢?比丘们,在这里,愚人想的是坏念头,说的是坏话,做的是坏事。比丘们,这就是愚人的三种愚人的相、愚人的标志、愚人的特征。”因为智者据此认定“这是愚人”,所以有三种愚人的相。经中又说:“比丘们,智者有三种智者的相、智者的标志、智者的特征。哪三种呢?比丘们,在这里,智者想的是好念头,说的是好话,做的是好事。比丘们,这就是智者的三种智者的相、智者的标志、智者的特征。”因为智者据此认定“这是智者”,所以有三种智者的相。
Lakkhaṇesu hi ‘‘tīṇimāni, bhikkhave, bālassa bālalakkhaṇāni bālanimittāni bālāpadānāni. Katamāni tīṇi? Idha, bhikkhave, bālo duccintitacintī ca hoti dubbhāsitabhāsī ca dukkaṭakammakārī ca. Imāni kho, bhikkhave, tīṇi bālassa bālalakkhaṇāni bālanimittāni bālāpadānānī’’ti (a. ni. 3.3; ma. ni. 3.246) vuttaṃ. Paṇḍitehi bālassa bāloti sallakkhaṇato tividhaṃ bālalakkhaṇaṃ. ‘‘Tīṇimāni, bhikkhave, paṇḍitassa paṇḍitalakkhaṇāni paṇḍitanimittāni paṇḍitāpadānāni. Katamāni tīṇi? Idha, bhikkhave, paṇḍito sucintitacintī ca hoti subhāsitabhāsī ca sukatakammakārī ca. Imāni kho, bhikkhave, tīṇi paṇḍitassa paṇḍitalakkhaṇāni paṇḍitanimittāni paṇḍitāpadānānī’’ti (a. ni. 3.3; ma. ni. 3.253) vuttaṃ. Paṇḍitehi paṇḍitassa paṇḍitoti sallakkhaṇato tividhaṃ paṇḍitalakkhaṇaṃ.
比丘们,有三种有为法的有为相。哪三种呢?生起被了知,坏灭被了知,住立者的变异被了知。比丘们,这些就是有为法的三种有为相。这是经中说的。生起本身即是有为相,以生起为有为之相,故名有为相。其余两种也应这样理解。由此说明:在生起的刹那,其余两种相不存在;在住的刹那,其余两种相不存在;在坏灭的刹那,其余两种相也不存在。不过,在这部经里以略说方式讲到生和老死的生起等相时,因为要显示变易空,便舍开了生老死,只按“有的终结”这个道理来说,这就和“生起等”“生起等”不说的时机相冲突。但应知道,这是因为它们落入了相的河流,所以是作为落入流中者而记录下来的。就像在阿毗达摩中,在无因异熟意界和意识界的摄集分里,虽然也能得到禅支,却说它们落入五识之流而不取出一样,这里也应理解为落入流中。或者也可以这样理解:就像在“以无常观生老死”等处,把有生老死的诸行的生起等,视同那些一样而说。
‘‘Tīṇimāni, bhikkhave, saṅkhatassa saṅkhatalakkhaṇāni. Katamāni tīṇi? Uppādo paññāyati, vayo paññāyati, ṭhitassa aññathattaṃ paññāyati. Imāni kho, bhikkhave, tīṇi saṅkhatassa saṅkhatalakkhaṇānī’’ti (a. ni. 3.47-48) vuttaṃ. Uppādo eva saṅkhatamiti lakkhaṇanti saṅkhatalakkhaṇaṃ. Evamitaradvayepi attho veditabbo. Iminā uppādakkhaṇe sesadvinnaṃ, ṭhitikkhaṇe sesadvinnaṃ, bhaṅgakkhaṇe ca sesadvinnaṃ abhāvo dassito. Yaṃ panettha peyyālamukhena jātiyā ca jarāmaraṇassa ca uppādādilakkhaṇaṃ vuttaṃ, taṃ vipariṇāmasuññatāya jātijarāmaraṇāni hitvā bhavapariyosānasseva nayassa vacanena ca uppādādīnaṃ uppādādiavacanasamayena ca virujjhati. Lakkhaṇasote patitattā pana sotapatitaṃ katvā likhitanti veditabbaṃ. Yathā ca abhidhamme (dha. sa. 562-565) ahetukavipākamanodhātumanoviññāṇadhātūnaṃ saṅgahavāre labbhamānampi jhānaṅgaṃ pañcaviññāṇasote patitvā gatanti na uddhaṭanti vuttaṃ, evamidhāpi sotapatitatā veditabbā. Atha vā jātijarāmaraṇavantānaṃ saṅkhārānaṃ uppādādayo ‘‘jātijarāmaraṇaṃ aniccato’’tiādīsu (paṭi. ma. 1.73; 2.4) viya tesaṃ viya katvā vuttanti veditabbaṃ.
欲贪被出离镇伏了,并且是空的:也就是说,欲贪被出离镇伏了,而且因为出离在那里不存在,所以欲贪就以那被称为镇伏的出离而成为空的。对其余各项也应这样套用理解。在这里,就彼分断和正断来说,凡是依彼分和正断所断除的,都已经是远远除去了,因此以“远除”这个含义,仍然用“镇伏”这个词来表达。
Nekkhammenakāmacchando vikkhambhito ceva suñño cāti kāmacchando nekkhammena vikkhambhito ceva nekkhammassa tattha abhāvato teneva vikkhambhanasaṅkhātena nekkhammena suñño ca. Evaṃ sesesupi yojanā kātabbā. Tadaṅgappahānasamucchedappahānesupi cettha tadaṅgavasena ca samucchedavasena ca pahīnaṃ dūrīkatameva hotīti iminā dūrīkaraṇaṭṭhena vikkhambhanaṃ vuttaṃ.
以出离而欲贪空,这是“彼分空”:也就是说,欲贪被出离断除了,所以欲贪因为那名为出离的支分而空。或者也可以说,任何欲贪,因为在出离那里不存在,所以欲贪就以出离这个支分而空。其余的每一项也应当这样套用理解。在这里,只是依据每一个支分在各自对应的地方不存在这一点,从近行定、安止定和观的角度,说明了彼分空。然而,因为文中没有说“断除”这样的话,所以是以坏灭随观为终点来讲观的,并没有讲四种道。在“以出离而欲贪被正断以及空”等语句中,应当依照在镇伏中所说的方法来理解其义。在这里,依彼分与镇伏而断除的欲贪等,也因为不再现起的缘故,而被称为正断,这是依这种方便说为正断;或者也可以理解为,依各自正断的作用成就,而以与道相应的出离等来说。在安息、出离、空之中,也应当依照这里所说的方法来理解其义。然而在这里,对于彼分、镇伏、正断、断除,是取安息的程度和出离的程度而说的。在这五种空中,出离等本身就是以镇伏、彼分、正断、安息、出离之名而说的。内的,就是内所摄。外的,就是外所摄。双的空的,就是两者皆空。在各自的等之中,也确实有双数和复数。
Nekkhammenakāmacchando tadaṅgasuññoti nekkhammena pahīno kāmacchando tena nekkhammasaṅkhātena aṅgena suñño. Atha vā yo koci kāmacchando nekkhammassa tattha abhāvato nekkhammena tena aṅgena suñño. Evaṃ sesesupi yojanā kātabbā. Tassa tassa aṅgassa tattha tattha abhāvamatteneva cettha upacārappanājhānavasena ca vipassanāvasena ca tadaṅgasuññatā niddiṭṭhā. Pahānadīpakassa vacanassa abhāvena pana vivaṭṭanānupassanaṃyeva pariyosānaṃ katvā vipassanā niddiṭṭhā, cattāro maggā na niddiṭṭhā. Nekkhammena kāmacchando samucchinno ceva suñño cātiādīsu vikkhambhane vuttanayeneva attho veditabbo. Tadaṅgavikkhambhanavasena pahīnānipi cettha samudācārābhāvato samucchinnāni nāma hontīti iminā pariyāyena samucchedo vutto, taṃtaṃsamucchedakiccasādhanavasena vā maggasampayuttanekkhammādivasena vuttantipi veditabbaṃ. Paṭippassaddhinissaraṇasuññesu ca idha vuttanayeneva attho veditabbo. Tadaṅgavikkhambhanasamucchedapahānesu panettha paṭippassaddhimattattaṃ nissaṭamattattañca gahetvā vuttaṃ. Pañcasupi etesu suññesu nekkhammādīniyeva vikkhambhanatadaṅgasamucchedapaṭippassaddhinissaraṇanāmena vuttāni. Ajjhattanti ajjhattabhūtaṃ. Bahiddhāti bahiddhābhūtaṃ. Dubhatosuññanti ubhayasuññaṃ. Paccattādīsupi hi to-itivacanaṃ hotiyeva.
六内处等,因为具有六内处等的状态,所以是同类;与其他类别则不同类。在“识身”等说法里,“身”这个词指的其实就是识等本身。在“出离寻求”等说法里,出离等本身正是被那些希求它、有智慧的人所寻求,所以叫“寻求”。或者也可以这样说:在前分位,对出离等的寻求本身也是以欲贪等而空的,更何况出离等本身呢?在“摄受”等说法里,出离等本身在前分位被寻求,在后分位被摄受,所以叫“摄受”;被摄受之后,以达成之方式而得,所以叫“获得”;获得之后,通过智慧而证得,所以叫“证得”。对于一性空和异性空,只是一起发问;解答了一性空之后,没有解答异性空就作了总结。为什么不解答呢?因为按照这里已经说过的法门,其搭配方式已经可以了知,所以不必解答。这里应当这样搭配:出离是一性,欲贪是异性,欲贪是异性,以出离这一性而空。其余各项也应这样搭配理解。
Cha ajjhattikāyatanādīni chaajjhattikāyatanādīnaṃ bhāvena sabhāgāni. Parehi visabhāgāni. Viññāṇakāyātiādīsu cettha kāyavacanena viññāṇādīniyeva vuttāni. Nekkhammesanādīsu nekkhammādīniyeva tadatthikehi viññūhi esīyantīti esanā. Atha vā pubbabhāge nekkhammādīnaṃ esanāpi kāmacchandādīhi suññā, kiṃ pana nekkhammādīnītipi vuttaṃ hoti? Pariggahādīsu nekkhammādīniyeva pubbabhāge esitāni aparabhāge pariggayhantīti pariggahoti, pariggahitāni pattivasena paṭilabbhantīti paṭilābhoti, paṭiladdhāni ñāṇavasena paṭivijjhīyantīti paṭivedhoti ca vuttāni. Ekattasuññañca nānattasuññañca sakiṃyeva pucchitvā ekattasuññaṃ vissajjetvā nānattasuññaṃ avissajjetvāva sakiṃ nigamanaṃ kataṃ. Kasmā na vissajjitanti ce? Vuttapariyāyenevettha yojanā ñāyatīti na vissajjitanti veditabbaṃ. Ayaṃ panettha yojanā – nekkhammaṃ ekattaṃ, kāmacchando nānattaṃ, kāmacchando nānattaṃ, nekkhammekattena suññanti. Evaṃ sesesupi yojanā veditabbā.
在忍等项中,出离等本身因为能忍受、能接受,所以叫忍;因为接受之后进入并安住,所以叫决意;因为进入安住之后只按自己所喜欢的那样去修习,所以叫深入。这里从具正知等开始的对胜义空的解说,在般涅槃智的解说中已经说明过了。
Khantiādīsu nekkhammādīniyeva khamanato ruccanato khantīti, rocitāniyeva pavisitvā tiṭṭhanato adhiṭṭhānanti, pavisitvā ṭhitānaṃ yathārucimeva sevanato pariyogāhananti ca vuttāni. Idhasampajānotiādiko paramatthasuññaniddeso parinibbānañāṇaniddese vaṇṇitoyeva.
在这所有空的当中,说“行空”“变坏空”和“相空”,是为了让人看清前面所说的那些法彼此不相混杂。凡是说不善这一方被善那一方空掉的地方,是为了显示不善的过患。凡是说善这一方被不善那一方空掉的地方,是为了显示善的功德。凡是说我、我所等空掉的地方,那是为了让人对一切行生起厌离。而说“最上空”和“胜义空”,则是为了激发对涅槃的努力精进。应当这样理解。
Imesu ca sabbesu suññesu saṅkhārasuññaṃ vipariṇāmasuññaṃ lakkhaṇasuññañca yathāvuttānaṃ dhammānaṃ aññamaññaasammissatādassanatthaṃ. Yattha pana akusalapakkhikānaṃ kusalapakkhikena suññatā vuttā, tena akusale ādīnavadassanatthaṃ. Yattha pana kusalapakkhikānaṃ akusalapakkhikena suññatā vuttā, tena kusale ānisaṃsadassanatthaṃ. Yattha attattaniyādīhi suññatā vuttā, taṃ sabbasaṅkhāresu nibbidājananatthaṃ. Aggasuññaṃ paramatthasuññañca nibbāne ussāhajananatthaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ.
在这两者当中,“最上空”和“胜义空”这两种空,从含义上说其实只是同一个涅槃;不过是按“最上”和“胜义”的角度,以及按“有余”和“无余”的角度,把它分成两种来说。这两种空,在“我、我所空”和“行空”上是相通的。“空空、内空、外空、双空、同类空、异类空”这六种空,其实只是“空空”本身,只是按内、外等区别而说成六种。这六种空,在“我、我所等空”上是相通的。行空、变坏空、相空;镇伏空、彼分空、断空、止息空、出离空;寻求空、执取空、获得空、通达空;一性空、异性空;忍空、决意空、深入空——这十七种空,是依各自当中不存在的那些法而说为空,也就是从那些法不存在的角度,分别一一宣说的。不过,行空、变坏空、相空,因为彼此不相混杂,所以是相通的;镇伏等五种,因为是以善分方面为空,所以是相通的;寻求等四种,以及忍等三种,因为是以不善分方面为空,所以是相通的;一性空和异性空,因为彼此相对立,所以是相通的。
Tesu aggasuññañca paramatthasuññañcāti dve suññāni atthato ekameva nibbānaṃ aggaparamatthavasena saupādisesaanupādisesavasena ca dvidhā katvā vuttaṃ. Tāni dve attattaniyasuññato saṅkhārasuññato ca sabhāgāni. ‘‘Suññasuññaṃ ajjhattasuññaṃ bahiddhāsuññaṃ dubhatosuññaṃ sabhāgasuññaṃ visabhāgasuñña’’nti imāni cha suññāni suññasuññameva hoti. Ajjhattādibhedato pana chadhā vuttāni. Tāni cha ca attattaniyādisuññato sabhāgāni. Saṅkhāravipariṇāmalakkhaṇasuññāni, vikkhambhanatadaṅgasamucchedapaṭippassaddhinissaraṇasuññāni, esanāpariggahapaṭilābhapaṭivedhasuññāni, ekattanānattasuññāni, khantiadhiṭṭhānapariyogāhanasuññāni cāti sattarasa suññāni attani avijjamānehi tehi tehi dhammehi suññattā avijjamānānaṃ vasena visuṃ visuṃ vuttāni. Saṅkhāravipariṇāmalakkhaṇasuññāni pana itarena itarena asammissavasena sabhāgāni, vikkhambhanādīni pañca kusalapakkhena suññattā sabhāgāni, esanādīni cattāri, khantiādīni ca tīṇi akusalapakkhena suññattā sabhāgāni, ekattanānattasuññāni aññamaññapaṭipakkhavasena sabhāgāni.
一切法简要来说,可以分为三类、两类和一类。
了知空的人,空义的通晓者,在此教法中赞扬它为“空”。
Sabbe dhammā samāsena, tidhā dvedhā tathekadhā; Suññāti suññatthavidū, vaṇṇayantīdha sāsane.
怎么讲呢?首先,一切世间法因为不具备恒常、清净、快乐、自我这些性质,所以是恒常空、清净空、快乐空、自我空。道与果的法因为不具备恒常、快乐、自我,所以是恒常空、快乐空、自我空;又因为是无常的,所以也是快乐空;因为是无漏的,所以不是清净空。涅槃法因为根本没有自我,所以是自我空。再说,一切世间和出世间的有为法,因为不存在任何众生,所以是众生空。无为的涅槃法,因为那些行也不存在,所以是行空。而一切有为法和无为法,因为不存在被称为“我”的个人,所以是自我空。
Kathaṃ? Sabbe tāva lokiyā dhammā dhuvasubhasukhaattavirahitattā dhuvasubhasukhaattasuññā. Maggaphaladhammā dhuvasukhattavirahitattā dhuvasukhattasuññā. Aniccattāyeva sukhena suññā. Anāsavattā na subhena suññā. Nibbānadhammo attasseva abhāvato attasuñño. Lokiyalokuttarā pana sabbepi saṅkhatā dhammā sattassa kassaci abhāvato sattasuññā. Asaṅkhato nibbānadhammo tesaṃ saṅkhārānampi abhāvato saṅkhārasuñño. Saṅkhatāsaṅkhatā pana sabbepi dhammā attasaṅkhātassa puggalassa abhāvato attasuññāti.